Mechanical engineering: Higher National Diploma (HND

ED/STV/2001/PI/16

Mechanical Engineering

Higher National Diploma (HND)

Curriculum and Course Specifications

NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

Federal Republic of Nigeria

UNESCO – Nigeria Project

2001

Mechanical Engineering - Higher National Diploma

(HND)

National Board for Technical Education Kaduna

OPTIONS IN:

1. MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING

2. POWER AND PLANT ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM AND COURSE SPECIFICATIONS

AUGUST 2001

PLOT ´B’ BIDA ROAD, P.M.B. 2239, KADUNA - NIGERIA.

Mineral Resources Students Conducting Practicals on

Humphrey's Spirial for Gravity Concentration of Minerals

2

Table of Contents

GENERAL INFORMATION HND.................................................................................................................... 4

CURRICULUM TABLE ................................................................................................................................... 9

MATHEMATICAL COURSES ....................................................................................................................... 13

Advanced Algebra .................................................................................................................................... 13

Advanced Calculus................................................................................................................................... 19

Numerical Methods................................................................................................................................... 24

Statistical Methods in Engineering............................................................................................................ 27

GENERAL STUDIES AND MANAGEMENT COURSES............................................................................... 31

Communication in English III .................................................................................................................... 31

Engineer in Society................................................................................................................................... 33

Entrepreneurship Development I .............................................................................................................. 40

Engineering Design .................................................................................................................................. 43

Technical Report Writing II ....................................................................................................................... 48

Business Management ............................................................................................................................. 49

Operations Management .......................................................................................................................... 51

Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................................... 53

Transport Management ............................................................................................................................ 55

Maintenance Management ....................................................................................................................... 57

COMPUTER AND ELECTRICAL COURSES ............................................................................................... 59

CAD/CAM................................................................................................................................................. 59

CNC: Programming & Robotics ................................................................................................................ 61

Computer Programming ........................................................................................................................... 63

Electrical Power And Machines ................................................................................................................ 70

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING COURSES.................................................................................................. 76

Strength of Materials I .............................................................................................................................. 76

Instrumentation and Control ..................................................................................................................... 80

Mechanics of Machines ............................................................................................................................ 90

Strength of Materials II ............................................................................................................................. 96

Fluid Mechanics...................................................................................................................................... 106

Metal Forming and Heat Treatment ........................................................................................................ 113

Joining and Fabrication Process............................................................................................................. 120

Foundry Technology and Practice .......................................................................................................... 127

Metrology................................................................................................................................................ 135

Testing and Failure of Materials ............................................................................................................. 144

Fluid Power Machines ............................................................................................................................ 152

Machine Element Design........................................................................................................................ 159

Engineering Materials and Application.................................................................................................... 167

Machine Tools Systems ......................................................................................................................... 171

Steam Power Engineering...................................................................................................................... 176

3

Machine Tools Processes....................................................................................................................... 187

Press and Cutting Tools Design ............................................................................................................. 190

Environmental Engineering..................................................................................................................... 198

Material Handling.................................................................................................................................... 202

Jigs, Fixture and Tool Design ................................................................................................................. 207

Machine Assembly Installation & Commissioning................................................................................... 209

Applied Thermodynamics ....................................................................................................................... 216

Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 222

Internal Combustion Engines.................................................................................................................. 228

Energy Conversion and Heat Transfer ................................................................................................... 233

Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning.......................................................................................................... 238

Mechanical Equipment in Buildings ........................................................................................................ 245

Automotive Technology .......................................................................................................................... 254

Process, Construction and Mining Equipment ........................................................................................ 263

Electro-Mechanical Controls................................................................................................................... 265

LIST OF WORKSHOP/LABORATORIES AND EQUIPMENT..................................................................... 271

GUIDELINES FOR TEXTBOOK WRITERS................................................................................................ 294

LIST OF PARTICIPANTS ........................................................................................................................... 295

4

GENERAL INFORMATION HND

1.0 PHILOSOPHY OF THE MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PROGRAMME

The Mechanical Engineering Programme is designed to reflect a FUNCTIONAL philosophy of education.

While seeking to achieve academic excellence and promote the furtherance of knowledge, the mechanical

engineering programme also seeks to aid “... the acquisition of appropriate skills, abilities and competence,

both mental and physical as equipment for the individual to live in and contribute to the development of

his/her society ...”

The programme is therefore committed to the production of qualified and competent technicians who will be

able to face the challenges concomitant with the aspiration of the country to be technological developed.

Power and Plant Engineering Technology option

The programme is designed to produce a power and plant technologist for the manufacturing, transportation

and power generating industries such as NEPA, NPA, NRC, REB. Diplomates of the programme should be

able to:

a. interpret information in mechanical and technical literature and specify requirements for

mechanical systems;

b. install, maintain, and repair industrial plants;

c. install, maintain, diagnose and repair power generating units such as internal combustion

engines, gas and steam turbines, hydraulic and pneumatic equipment, e.g. forklift,

compressors and steam boilers;

d. supervise mechanical engineering technicians, craftsmen and artisans in a manufacturing

and other process and industrial plants;

e. plan and execute maintenance operations in industrial

5

Manufacturing Engineering Technology

Mechanical - Manufacturing Engineering Technology

The programme in Manufacturing Engineering technology is aimed at producing technologists with

knowledge and skills for manufacturing and maintenance of the mechanical engineering and similar

industries. Diplomates of the programme should be able to:

a. use and operate various machine tools and equipment in the manufacturing of

engineering components.

b. Understand the principles and application of manufacturing management techniques;

c. Design tools and jigs and produce proto-type of such items;

d. Fabricate metal products using various techniques and processes;

e. Plan and carry out installation, maintenance and repair of plant, machines and equipment;

f. Manage materials and human resources in the manufacturing industries at this level.

6

2.0 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS

The general entry requirements for the HND programme include:

a. all the requirements for admission into the ND programme in mechanical engineering

b. a minimum of lower credit pass (CGPA) of 2.50 and above in the ND examination in

Mechanical Engineering Technology; and

c. a minimum of one year cognate work experience.

In exceptional cases, the ND diplomates with a pass grade (CGPA) 2.0 - 2.49) in the ND examination that

had two or more years of cognate work experience may be considered for admission into the HND

programme. However, the number of candidates should not be more than 10% of the total student intake in

each class.

3.0 DURATION

The programme is designed to run for four semesters, that is two academic sessions.

4.0 CURRICULUM

4.1 The curriculum of HND programme consist of four main components. These are:

a. General studies/education

b. Foundation courses.

c. Professional courses

d. Project.

4.2 The General Education component shall include courses in:

English Language, Communication, Industrial Management and Engineer in Society, The

General Education component shall account for not more than 15% of the total contact

hours for the programme.

4.3 Foundation courses include courses in Mathematics. The number of hours for the programme may

account for about 10-15% of the total contact hours.

4.4 Professional courses are ore courses of the programme which give the student the theory and

professional skills he needs to practise his field of calling at the technician/technologist level. These may

account for between 60-70% of the contact hours.

7

5.0 CURRICULUM STRUCTURE

The structure of the Higher National Diploma programme consists of four semester of classroom, laboratory

and workshop activities in the college. Each semester shall be of 18 weeks duration made up as follows:

a. 15 weeks of teaching, i.e. recitation, practical exercise, quizzes, test, etc; and

b. 3 weeks for examinations and registration.

6.0 ACCREDITATION

The Diploma programme shall be accreditation by the National Board for Technical Education before the

diplomates can be awarded the National Diploma certificates. Details about the process of accrediting a

programme for the award of the National Diploma are available from the Executive Secretary, National Board

for Technical Education, Plot “B”, Bida Road, P.M.B. 2239, Kaduna, Nigeria.

7.0 AWARD OF HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA

Conditions for the award of Higher National Diploma include the following:

a. Satisfactory performance in all prescribed course work which may include class work,

tests, quizzes.

b. Workshop practice, laboratory work.

c. Satisfactory performance at all semester examinations.

d. Satisfactory completion of final year project work Normally, continuous assessment

contributes 30%, project work 10% while semester examinations are weighted 60% to make

a total of 100%.

Higher National Diploma should be awarded in four classes:

a. (i) Distinction - CGPA of 3.50 and above

b. (ii) Upper Credit - CGPA of 3.0 - 3.49

c. (iii) Lower Credit - CGPA of 2.50 - 2.99

d. (iv) Pass - CGPA of 2.00 - 2.49.

8.0 GUIDANCE NOTES FOR TEACHERS

8.1 The new curriculum is drawn in unit courses. This is in keeping with the provisions of the National Policy

on Education which stress the need to introduce the semester credit units which will enable a student who so

wish to transfer the units already completed in an institution similar standard from which he/she is

transferring.

8

8.2 In designing the units, the principle of the modular system by product has been adopted, thus making

each of the professional modules, when completed provides the student with technician operative skills,

which can be used for employment purposes self - and otherwise.

8.4 As the success of the credit unit system depends on the articulation of programmes between the

institutions and industry, the curriculum content has been written in behavioural objectives, so that it is clear

to all the expected performance of the student who successfully completed some of the courses or the

diplomates of the programme. This is slight departure in the presentation of the performance based

curriculum which requires the conditions under which the performance are expected to be carried out and

the criteria for the acceptable levels of performance. It is a deliberate attempt to further involve the staff of

the department teaching he programme to write their own curriculum stating the conditions existing in their

institution under which performance can take place and to follow that with the criteria for determining an

acceptance level of performance.

Departmental submission on the final curriculum may be vetted by the Academic Board of the institution. Our

aim is to continue to see to it that a solid internal evaluation system exists in each institution for ensuring

minimum standard and quality of education in the programmes offered throughout the Polytechnic system.

8.5 The teaching of the theory and practical work should, as much as possible, be integrated. Practical

exercises, especially those in professional courses and laboratory work should not be taught in isolation from

the theory. For each course, there should be a balance of theory to practical in the ratio of 50:50 or 60:40 or

the reverse.

9.0 FINAL YEAR PROJECT

Final year students in this programme are expected to carryout a project work. This could be on individual

basis or group work. The project should, as much as possible incorporates basic element of design, drawing

and complete fabrication of a marketable item or something that can be put to use. Project reports should be

well presented and should be properly supervised.

The departments should make their own arrangement of schedules for project work.

9

CURRICULUM TABLE

HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (HND)

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MANUFACTURING (OPTION)

First Semester

COURSE CODE COURSE/MODULE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 302 Communication in English III 1 1 - 2 2

MTH 311 Advanced Algebra 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 311 Engineer in Society 1 1 - 2 2

SDV 210 Entrepreneurship Development 2 1 - 3 3

MEC 312 Engineering Design 1 2 - 3 3

MEC 313 Strength of Materials 1 1 1 1 3 3

MEC 314 Instrumentation and Control 1 - 2 3 3

MEC 315 Mechanics of Machines 2 - 2 4 4

MEC 316 CAD/CAM 1 - 3 4 4

ICT 101 Computer Programming - - 2 2 2

Total 11 7 10 28 28

Second Semester


MEC 317 Technical Report Writing II 1 1 - 2 2

MTH 312 Advanced Calculus 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 321 Business Management 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 322 Strength of Materials II 2 - 2 4 4

MEC 323 Fluid Mechanics 2 - 2 4 4

MEM 321 Metal Forming and Heat Treatment 2 - 4 6 6

MEM 322 Joining and Fabrication Processes 2 - 4 6 6

MEM 323 Foundry Technology and Practice 1 1 2 4 4

Total 12 4 14 30 30

10

Third Semester


MTH 313 Numerical Method 1 1 - 2 2

MEM 416 CNC Programming & Robotics 1 2 - 3 3

MEM 411 Metrology 1 - 2 3 3

MEM 412 Testing and Failure of Materials 2 - 2 4 4

MEC 412 Fluid Power Machines 2 - 2 4 4

MEM 413 Machine Elements Design 2 - 4 6 6

MEM 414 Operations Management 1 - 2 3 3

MEM 415 Engineering Materials and Applications 2 - 1 3 3

MEC 400 Project - - 3 3 3

Total 12 3 16 31 31

Fourth Semester


MTH 413 Statistical Methods in Engineering 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 427 Quality Assurance 2 - 1 3 3

MEM 421 Machine Tools Systems 1 - 2 3 3

MEM 422 Machine Tool Processes 2 - 2 4 4

MEM423 Press & cutting Tools Design 2 - 2 4 4

MEP 426 Steam Power Engineering 1 - 1 2 2

MEP 425 Industrial Engineering 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 411 Environmental Engineering 1 1 - 2 2

MEM 424 Materials Handling 1 1 - 2 2

MEM 425 Jigs, Fixtures and Tool Design 2 - 2 4 4

MEM 426 Machine Assembly, Installation and Commissioning 2 - 2 4 4


Total 16 4 18 38 38

11

HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (HND)

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PLANT ENGINEERING (OPTION)

First Semester


GNS 302 Communication in English III (Comprehension & Essay Writing) 1 1 - 2 2

MTH 311 Advanced Algebra 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 311 Engineer in Society 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 316 CAD/CAM 1 - 3 4 4

MEC 312 Engineering Design 1 2 - 3 3

MEC 314 Instrumentation and Control 1 - 2 3 3

MEC 315 Mechanics of Machines 2 - 2 4 4

SDV 210 Entrepreneurship Development 2 1 - 3 3

ICT 101 Computer Programming - - 2 2 2

Total 10 6 9 25 25

Second Semester


MEC 317 Technical Report Writing II 1 1 - 2 2

MTH 312 Advanced Calculus 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 321 Business Management 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 322 Strength of Materials II 2 - 2 3 4

MEC 323 Fluid Mechanics II 2 - 2 3 4

MEP 321 Applied Thermodynamics 2 - 2 3 4

MEP322 Safety 2 - 2 3 4

MEP 323 Internal Combustion Engines 2 - 2 3 4

MEP 311 Energy Conversion and Heat Transfer 2 - 2 3 4

Total 15 3 12 30 30

12

Third Semester


MTH 313 Numerical method 1 1 2 2

MEC 411 Environmental Engineering 1 1 - 2 2

MEC 412 Fluid Power Machines 2 - 2 4 4

EEC442 Electrical Power and Machines 2 - 2 4 4

MEP 411 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2 - 3 5 5

MEP 412 Mechanical Equipment in Building 2 - 3 5 5

MEP 413 Automotive Technology 2 - 3 5 5


Total 1

2

1

2

16 30 30

Fourth Semester


MTH 413 Statistics Methods 1 1 2 2

MEC 427 Quality Assurance 2 1 - 3 3

MEP 421 Construction and Materials Handling Equipment 1 - 2 3 3

MEP 422 Transport Economics 2 - 2 4 4

MEP 423 Maintenance Management 2 - 2 4 4

MEP 424 Electro-Mechanical Controls in Refrigeration & Air-conditioning 1 1 - 2 2

MEP 425 Industrial Engineering 1 - 1 2 2

MEP 426 Steam Power Engineering 1 - 1 2 2

MEM 426 Machine Assembly, Installation & Commissioning 2 - 2 4 4


Total 13 3 16 32 32

13

MATHEMATICAL COURSES Advanced Algebra

PROGRAMME: HND IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY

Course: ADVANCED ALGEBRA Course Code: MTH 311 Contact Hours

2HRS/WK

Course Specification: Theoretical Content

General Objective 1.0: Understand hyperbolic, exponential and logarithmic functions Week

Specific Learning Outcome: Teachers Activities Resources

1-2

1.1 Define hyperbolic sine and cosine

functions in terms of exponential

functions

1.2 Draw the hyperbolic graphs for

sine, cosine, tangent

1.3 Transform hyperbolic to

trigonometrical functions, and vice -

versa

1.4 Evaluate universal trigonometric

logarithmic functions

1.5 Review logarithmic functions

1.6 Solve problems involving 1.4 above

e.g evaluate tan-1(1) - tan-1(-1)

• The teacher to illustrate with good

examples and make notes where

necessary

• Ask the students:

• to define hyperbolic sine and cosine

functions in terms of exponential

functions and draw the hyperbolic

graphs for sine, cosine, tangent

• to transform hyperbolic to

trigonomentrical functions, and vice-

versa

• to evaluate universal trigonometrical

functions and solve problems relating

to it. E.g tan-1(1) - tan-1(-1)

• Assess the students

• Recommended

textbook, chalkboard,

chalk, lecture notes

etc.

14



2HRS/WK


General Objective: 2.0 Understand power, Maclaurin and Taylor series with application to logarithmic

trigonometric and hyperbolic Functions

Week Specific Learning Outcome: Teachers Activities Resources

4-5

2.1 State the power series of the form

(1+n)

2.2 Evaluate power series in 2.1 above

2.3 Test for the

convergence/divergence of the series

in 2.2 above

2.4 Apply Taylor’s formula

2.5 Derive Macclaurin series from

Taylor’s formula

2.6 Expand functions of the form cosx,

sinx tanhx, ex Evaluate functions like

sin 31o ex Text for the

convergency/divergency of the series

from 2.3 to 2.6 above

2.7 Test for absolute convergency of

the series from 2.3 to 2.6 above

2.8 State the L’Hospital rule

2.9 Apply L’Hospital’s rule to solve the

problems in determinants

• to state the power series of the form

(1+n) and also evaluate it.

• to test for the

convergence/divergence of the series

• to apply Taylor’s formula and derive

Macclaurin series from Taylor’s

formula

• to expand functions of the form

cosx, sinx, tanhx, ex and evaluate

functions like sin 31o ex

• to test for absolute convergency of

the series evaluate above

• to state the ¼ Hospital’s rule and

apply it to solve problems in

determinants, trigonometric and

logarithmic series


• Chalk, blackboard,

• Lecture note

6 2.10 Apply ¼ Hospital’s rule to

trigonometric and logarithmic series.

15



2HRS/WK


General Objective 3.0: Understand the principle of mathematical Induction


7-8

3.1 Establish the truth theorem for

specific value

3.2 Explain for some fixed integer, n,

the truth theorem

3.3 Explain the truth theorem for an

integral value (n+1)

3.4 Explain the application of

mathematical induction on Arithmetic

progression? Σnr

3.5 Geometric progression? Σnr2

• Ask the student to:

• establish the truth theorem for

specific value, and explain for some

fixed integer n, the truth theorem

• ask the students to explain the truth

theorem for an integral value (n+1)

• explain the application of

mathematical induction on Arithmetic

progression or

• Geometric progression? Σnr2


16


Course: ADVANCED ALGEBRA Course Code: MTH 311 Contact Hours 2HRS/WK


General Objective 4.0: Understand the principles of matrices as applied to engineering problems


9-10

4.1 Define types of matrices, null

square, rectangular row

4.2 From matrices from sets of linear

equations

4.3 Perform the Arithmetic operations

in matrices. Addition, subtraction, etc.

4.4 Obtain the transpose, adjunct, co-

factors and the inverse of a matrix

4.5 Describe the use of matrix method

to linear simultaneous equation

4.6 Define the Eigen-vector and Eigen-

value for a set of matrices

4.7 Perform the partitioning method for

very large matrices

4.8 Apply matrices to engineering

problems

• Ask the students to: • define types of matrices - null, square, rectangular, row and form matrices from sets of linear equations • perform Arithmetic operations in matrices for example: if

Find(i) A + B,(ii) A - B • Use good examples to illustrate the transpose, adjunct co-factors and inverse of a matrix • Assess the students • Explain how to use matrix to solve linear simultaneous equations. And ask the students to solve some examples • Explain eigenvector and Eigenvalue for set of matrices • Assess the students • Compute AB, given

and

• by partitioning. • Illustrate how matrices are applied in engineering problem. • Assess the students

17



2HRS/WK


General Objective 5.0: Understand the principle of vector Algebra


12-13

5.1 Add, subtract and multiply vectors

5.2 State the divergence theorem

5.3 Explain surface integrals as volume

integrals

5.4 Stocke’s theorem

5.5 Evaluate certain integrals using

stocke’s

5.6 Explain vector integration, and

vector differential gradient and

divergence

• Explain to the students with good


necessary

• Ask the students to:

• carry out the addition, subtraction

and multiplication of vectors

• to state divergence and stocke’s

theorems

• evaluate certain integrals using

stocke’s formula

• explain surface integrals as volume

integrals

• explain vector integration, and

vector differential gradient and

divergence and apply the analysis to

engineering problems.

• Assess the students.

• Recommended


lecture notes

18



2HRS/WK


General Objective 6.0: Understand the concept and application of complex numbers


14-15

6.1 Explain complex number

6.2 Explain rectangular and polar forms

of complex number

6.3 Explain the addition and subtraction

of complex numbers

6.4 Explain the multiplication and

division of complex numbers

6.5 Compute modules and argument of

complex numbers e.g → e = 3+4í

Find Z→/e/

6.6 Define a complex number using

Argand’s diagram

6.7 Add and subtract two samples

number using argand diagram

6.8 State De Moiver’s theorem for an

integer (positive and negative)

6.9 Apply De Moiver’s theorem to A.C

theory

6.10 Solve equations involving two

more complex numbers e.g solve the

following equation for the real numbers

x and y:

(3 + 4í)2 - 2 (n + íy) = n + íy

6.11 Explain rationalization of complex

numbers

• The teacher to explain to the

students with good examples and

make notes where necessary


• perform the addition, subtraction,

multiplication and division of complex

numbers

• to compute modules and argument

of complex numberse.g Z = 3 + 4í

Find/Z/, Arg.Z

• define complex number using

argands’s diagram


• Recommended

textbooks

• Chalkboard

• Lecture Note

19

Advanced Calculus


Course: ADVANCED CALCULUS Course Code: MTH 312 Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Understand Lap lace transform


1 - 2

1.1 Define Laplace transform

1.2 Obtain Laplace transform of simple

functions

1.3 Define the inverse Laplace transform

1.4 Obtain the inverse Laplace transform

of simple functions

1.5 Evaluate some partial fractions with:

a. linear denominator

b. quadratic

1.6 Express the derivative inLlaplace

transform

1.7 Express unit step, impulse Driac

delta and ramp functions in laplace

transform

1.8 Apply Laplace transform to

differential equatione.g solve by Laplace

transform the boundary - value

problem?

u(O,t) = 0, u(3,t) = O

u(x, O) = I0 sin 2 x - 6 sin 4x



necessary


• define Laplace transform and apply

in simple functions

• evaluate some partial fractions as

indicated in 1.5 and express the

derivative in Laplace transform.


• Recommended

textbook,

chalkboard, chalk,

lecture notes, etc

3 - 4

1.9 Apply Laplace transform to suitable

engineering problems e.g use Laplace

transform to find the charge and current

at anytime in a series circuit having an

inductance L, capacitance C, Resistance

R, emf E, assume charge and current

are zero

20



2HRS/WK


General Objective 2.0: Understand Fourier series and apply it to solve engineering problems


5 - 6

2.1 Define Fourier series

2.2 Explain the periodic function

2.3 Explain the non-periodic function

2.4 Identify even and odd functions

2.5 Explain even and odd functions using

graphical representation

2.6 Explain the characteristics of even

and odd functions

2.7 Derive the Fourier coefficients in both

polar and rectangular forms

2.8 Expand simple functions in Fourier

series e.g

a. simple linear algebraic

functions

b. trigonometric and

logarithmic functions

2.9 Derive the Fourier series for a

trigonometric function using the half

range approach

2.10 Expand functions with arbitrary

period

2.11 State the Euler’s formula

2.12 Establish a complex Fourier series

2.13 Evaluate the integration of Fourier

series

2.14 Apply Fourier series to suitable

engineering problems


examples -and make notes where

necessary.


• define Fourier series, explain the

periodic and non periodic functions,

identify even and odd functions and

explain them using graphical

representation


• Ask the students to derive the

Fourier coefficients in both the polar

and rectangular forms



• expand simple functions in Fourier

series as indicated in 2.8

• derive Fourier series for

trigonometric functions using the half

range approach, and expand

functions with arbitrary period

• state Euler’s formula and establish a

complex Fourier series

• evaluate the integration of Fourier

series and apply Fourier series to

solve engineering problems


• Recommended

textbooks,

Chalkboard, Chalk,

Lecture note, etc.

21



2HRS/WK


General Objective 3.0: Understand the methods of solving second - order differential equations


7 - 8

3.1 Identify a homogeneous linear

equation of the second order

3.2 Establish the second order

differential equation with constant

coefficients viz:

3.3 Find the real and distinct, equal and

complex roots for 3.2 above

3.4 Solve the fundamental system of

general solution, given initial values

3.5 State Caudiy’s equation

3.6 Explain the existence and

uniqueness of solutions to 2nd Order

differential equations problems

3.7 Explain the homogeneous linear

equations of higher order constant

coefficients

3.8 Solve non-homogeneous differential

equations

3.9 Solve simple simultaneous

differential equations



necessary


establish 2nd Order D.E with constant

coefficients viz:

and find the real and distinct, equal

and complex roots for the equation

above.

solve the fundamental system of

general solution, given initial values

and also to state Caudiy’s equation.



• explain the existence and

uniqueness of solutions to 2nd Order

differential equations problems and

homogeneous linear equations of

higher order constant coefficients

• solve many problems on non-

homogeneous differential equations,

and simple simultaneous differential

equations


22



2HRS/WK


General Objective 4.0: Understand methods of solving simultaneous linear differential equations


9 - 10

4.1 Explain linear differential equation

4.2 Identify special cases of solving first -

order differential equations

4.3 Apply the method of exact equations,

separable variable to solve differential

equation problems

4.4 Apply knowledge of linear differential

equation to suitable engineering

problems



necessary


• explain linear differential equation

and identify special cases of solving

first-order differential equations

• apply the equation, separable

variable to solve differential quation

problems and apply it in suitable



General Objective 5.0: Understand the methods of solving partial differential equations and their uses


11 -

12

5.1 State partial differential equation of

order 2

5.2 Solve partial differential equation

using “variable separable”

5.3 Apply D’ Alembert’s solution of the

wave equation to partial differential

equation problems

5.4 Apply the Laplacian concept in polar

coordinates to partial differential

equation problems



necessary


• state 2nd - order partial differential

equation and solve many problems on

it using “variable separable” method

• apply D’Alembert’s solution of the

wave equation and Laplacian concept

in polar coordinates to partial

differential equation problems


23



2HRS/WK


General Objective 6.0: Understand the principles of functions of several variables and their uses


13 -

15

6.1 Explain limits and continuity of given

functions

6.2 Explain mean-value theorem using

total differentials

6.3 State Taylor’s formula for functions of

several variables

6.4 Derive maxima and minima of

functions of several variables including

possible saddle points

6.5 Establish the constrained maxima

functions of several variables

6.6 Define a line integral in a plane

6.7 Explain the path of integral

6.8 Evaluate line integral problems

6.9 Define the green’s theorem in a

plane

6.10 Apply green’s theorem to solve line

integral problems

6.11 Apply double integral to line

integrals

6.12 Apply change of variables in triple

integrals

6.13 Evaluate the differentiation under

the integral sign

6.14 State stoke formula

6.15 Apply stoke formula to line integrals

in space

6.16 Apply stoke’s formula to suitable




necessary


• explain limits, continuity of given

functions, and mean value theorem

using total differentials.

• State Taylor’s formula, derive

maxima and minima of functions of

several variables including possible

saddue points

• Establish the constrained maxima

functions of several variables, define

a line integral in a plane and explain

the path of integral



• evaluate line integral problems

• define green’s theorem in a plane

and apply it to solve line integral

problems

• apply double integral to line integral

and change of variable in triple

integrals

• evaluate differentiation under the

integral sign, state stokes formula and

apply it to line integrals in space

• how stoke’s formula is applied to



• Recommended

textbooks,

chalkboard, chalk,

lecture notes etc.

24

Numerical Methods


Course: NUMERICAL METHODS Course Code: MTH 313 Contact Hours 2

HRS/WEEK


General Objective: 1.0 Understand the use of numerical methods to solve linear and non-linear

equations


1-3

1.1 Find solution of linear algebraic

equation using Guass elimination

method

1.2 Solve linear algebraic equations

using Guass-seidel iteration methods

1.3 Apply Newton-Raphson iteration

formulae to non-linear equations e.g.

find the roots of the equation Cosx = x2

as accurately as your tables permit.

Find the square root seriat of log x2-5

• The teacher to illustrate with

good examples and make notes

where necessary


• linear algebraic equation using

gauss-seidel-elimination and

iteration methods

• apply Newton-Raphson iteration

formulae to non linear equations,

as indicated in 1.3

• Recommended

textbooks, chalkboard,

chalk lecturer notes etc

General Objective 2.0: Understand finite Differences


4-5

2.1 Define finite differences

2.2 Explain the forward differencing

tabulation

2.3 Explain the building of errors in a

difference table

2.4 Explain the backward difference

table

2.5 Explain the central difference

formula

2.6 Apply the forward, backward and

central difference formula or tables in

solving related practical problems



where necessary


• define finite differences and

explain the forward differencing

tabulation

• Explain the build-up of errors in a

difference table, and backward

difference table, and central

difference formula

• Apply the forward, backward,

and central difference formula or

tables in solving related practical

problems


• Recommended



25



HRS/WEEK


General Objective 3.0: Understand interpolation as applied to difference table


6-7

3.1 Define the Newton-gregory forward

difference interpolation formula

3.2 Evaluate the difference table with

unequal interval using divided

differences

3.3 State lagrange’s interpolation

formula

3.4 Evaluate a table using largange

interpolation formula



were necessary


• define the Newton-gregory

forward difference interpolation

formula and evaluate the

difference table with inequal

interval using divided differences

• state Lagrange’s interpolation

formula, and evaluate a table

using it

• Recommended



General Objective 4.0: Understand Numerical Differentiation


8

4.1 Explain the basic process of

numerical differentiation up to the third

derivative

4.2 Explain differentiation based on

equal interval interpolation formula

4.3 Evaluate higher order derivatives



were necessary


• Explain basic process of

numerical differentiation up to the

their derivative. The explanation

must be based on equal interval

interpolation on formula

• Evaluate higher order derivatives


• Recommended



26



HRS/WEEK


General Objective 5.0: Understand Numerical Integration


9

5.1 explain the Trapezoidal and

Simpson’s rules

5.2 evaluate an integral using the three-

sights rule



were necessary

• Ask the students to explain the

Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules

and also to evaluate an integral

using the three sights rule

• Recommended



General Objective 6.0: Understand numerical methods of solving first and second order ordinary

differential equation


10-15

6.1 Explain Runge-Kutta’s and Euler’s

methods

6.2 Solve the first order ordinary

differential equation, using Runge-

Kutta’s methode.g if dy = 2x + y, y(0) =

1, find the approximate value of y, using

(a) Euler’s and (b) Runger-Kutta’s

methods

6.3 Solve the second order ordinary

differential equation using Rung-Kutta’s

method



were necessary


• explain Runge-Kutta’s and

Euler’s methods and use it to

solve 1st order differential equation

of the form - dy = 2x +y, y(0)=1

• solve many problems on 2nd

order ordinary differential equation

using Rung-Kutta’s method

• Recommended



27

Statistical Methods in Engineering


Course: STATISTICAL METHODS IN

ENGINEERING Course Code: MTH 413

Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective: 1.0 Understand the basic concept of probability distributions and same in solving

engineering problems Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teachers Activities Resources

1 - 3

1.1 Define a Binomial distribution

1.2 Explain the characteristics of

Binomial distribution

1.3 Apply Binomial distribution to

samples with replacement

1.4 Apply Binomial distribution to


1.5 Define the Normal Distribution


normal distribution

1.7 Describe normal distribution

curve and the empirical rule

• The teacher to illustrate with good examples and make notes where necessary • Ask the students to:

i. define Binomial distribution, explain its characteristics and apply it to samples with replacement, and to solve engineering problems. ii. Define normal distribution, explain its characteristics and describe normal distribution curve and the empirical rule


• Recommended

textbooks,

chalkboard, chalk

lecturer notes etc

4 - 6

1.8 Calculate probability given the

mean and the standard deviation

1.9 Calculate the deviation Z given

the mean, standard deviation, and a

particular observation

1.10 Calculate the area under the

curve at different points from either

side of the mean

1.11 Apply normal distribution curve

to simple engineering problems

1.12 Define Poisson’s distribution


Poisson distribution

1.14 Explain the quality control

techniques in production process


i. calculate probability given

the mean and standard

deviation

ii. calculate the deviation Z

given the mean, standard

deviation, and a particular

observation

iii. calculate the area under

the curve at different points

from either side of the mean

and also apply normal

distribution curve to simple



28




Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective: 1.0 Understand the basic concept of probability distributions and same in solving

engineering problems Week


7

1.15 Explain acceptance sampling

as applied to mass production

1.16 Test for equality of means of

given population using t-test

1.17 Test for equality of variances

using the F-test

1.18 Apply the chi-square test in

statistical quality control


i. define Poisson distribution,

explain it characteristics,

and explain the quality

control techniques in

production process

ii. explain acceptance

sampling as applied to mass

production

iii. test for equality of means

of given population and

equality of variances using t-

test and f-test respectively

iv. apply the chi-square test

in statistical quality control


29




Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective 2.0: Understand the principle of reliability


8-10

2.1 Distinguish between validity and

reliability

2.2 List types of reliability testing

2.3 State the procedures for

determining test-retest reliability

2.4 Apply test - retest reliability to

samples

2.5 State the procedures for

determining split half reliability

2.6 Determine the reliability

coefficient

2.7 Determine the acceptance level

of reliability

2.8 Determine the standard error of

measurement

where

SD = standard

deviation

r = error

SEM = standard

error

i. Ask the students to:

ii. distinguish between validity and reliability

and list types of reliability testing

iii. state the procedures for determining test-

retest reliability and apply it to samples

iv. state the procedures for determining split

half reliability, determine the reliability

coefficient and acceptance level of reliability


i. Ask the students to

determine the standard error

of measurement, using the

following expression

where

SD = standard deviation

r = error

SEM = standard error


Recommended

textbooks,

chalkboard, chalk

lecturer notes etc

30




Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective: 3.0 Understand Basic statistical experimental designs


12-15

3.1 Describe various experimental

designs e.g complete randomized

block design, randomized complete

block design, split squares, Graeco

Latin squares

3.2 List examples of when any of 3.1

above can be used

3.3 Enumerate the advantages and

disadvantages of using the various

designs in 3.1 above


i. describe various

experimental designs as

indicated in 3.1 and list

examples of when any of the

designs can be used

ii. enumerate the

advantages and

disadvantages of using the

various designs indicated in

3.1 above


• Recommended

textbooks,

chalkboard, chalk

lecturer notes etc

31

GENERAL STUDIES AND MANAGEMENT COURSES Communication in English III

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY

Course: Communication in English III

(Comprehension and Essay writing) Course Code: GNS 302

Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Understand the principles and practice of written communication Week


1-5

1.1 Explain the principles of letter

writing

1.2 Explain the components of a

business letter

1.3 Differentiate between a memo

and a letter

1.4 Prepare a portfolio of

correspondence using different

presentation techniques:

appointments, promotions,

dismissals, commendation,

queries, condolences,

congratulations, etc



necessary


principles of letter writing and the

components of a business letter

• Ask the students to differentiate

between a memo and a letter and also to

prepare a portfolio of correspondences

using different presentation techniques,

appointments, promotions, dismissals,

commendations, queries, condolences,

congratulations etc.


• Recommended


White Board chalk,

lecture notes etc

General Objective 2.0: Comprehend more difficult reading materials


6-10

Comprehension:

2.1 Read passages of expository

and argumentative writing

2.2 Trace the logic in the

passages in 2.1 above

2.3 Differentiate between factors

and opinions

2.4 Answer questions on what is

read

• Ask the students to read passages of

expository and argumentative writing,

and trace the logic in the passages read,

and answer questions on what is read to

differentiate between facts and opinion.

Assess the students

• Recommended

Textbook, Chalkboard,

chalk, lecture notes

32


Course: Communication in English III

(Comprehension and Essay writing) Course Code: GNS 302

Contact Hours

2HRS/WK


General Objective 3.0: Know how to write different types of essays


11 - 15

3.1 Explain the different types of

essays

3.2 Explain the characteristic of

each type in 3.1 above

3.3 Explain the logical orders of

presentation, e.g chronological,

spatial, general-to-specific,

specific-to-general, attention,

inductive, deductive etc.

3.4 Write an expository essay

3.5 Write an argumentative essay

• Ask the students:

• to explain the different types of essays

and the characteristics of each type

• to explain the logical orders of

presentation, e.g chronological, spatial,

general-to-specific, specific-to-general,

alternation, inductive, deductive, etc.

• to write expository and argumentative

essays


33

Engineer in Society

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course: ENGINEER IN SOCIETY Course Code: MEC 311 Contact Hours: 2

hours/wk


General Objective 1.0: Understand the early development of technology Week


1

1.1 Define the term Service

1.2 Define the term engineering

1.3 Define the term technology, integrating the

views of Drucker, Genron, Schon, etc

1.4 Trace the history of engineering from early

Egyptian, Greek and Roman civilizations

1.5 Evaluate the contribution and problems of

early technology

1.6 Evaluate the contributions and problems of

early technology

• Ask the students to illustrate

a concept in science,

engineering and technology

• Recommended

• Textbook

• Chalkboard

• Lecture note

General Objective 2.0: Comprehend the history of modern technology


2

2.1 Critically examine the concept of modern

technology

2.2 Trace the historical development of modern

civilization

2.3 Evaluate the events in the 16th and 17th

centuries which made scientific enquiry a tool

for technology development

2.4 Define and explain the term industrial

Revolution

2.5 Analyze the impact of the industrial

Revolution in Europe

2.6 Outline the lessons of the Industrial

Revolution in Nigeria

• Ask the students to give

examples of early

technology, in Nigeria and

elsewhere

• Ask the students to

enumerate technological

innovations of the 16h and

17th centuries

34



hours/wk


General Objective 3.0: Appreciate Technological Advancements


3

3.1 State the pervasive nature of technological

advances

3.2 illustrate the role of materials in technology.

3.3 illustrate the importance of technology in

the manufacturing Industry

3.4 Evaluate Lady Woodwards

“TechnologyTheory”

3.5 State the role of technology in the

development of power and fuels

3.6 Explain improvement in transportation

through technology

3.7 Evaluate technology advances in

electronics

• Ask the students to trace

the history of revolution from

Britain to Nigeria

• Ask the students to list the

historical development of

transportation from steam

engines to jet engines

• Ask the students to list the

advances in electronics from

electron tubes to chips

- do -

General Objective 4.0: Understand Technological Development in Nigeria


4

4.1 Explain early indigenous technology in

Nigeria

4.2 Explain the influence of foreign technology

on Nigeria Indigenous technology

4.3 State the main features of Nigeria National

policy on Technology

4.4 Evaluate the present state of Technology in

Nigeria

• Ask the students to name

outstanding technological

development in Nigeria That

are wholly indigenous

- do -

35



hours/wk


General Objective 5.0: Comprehend the technical education System in Nigeria


5

5.1 Analyse the advantages and disadvantages

of importation of “foreign expertise” on Nigerian

Technology

5.2 Examine the implication of the “Lima Target

‘‘ for Nigeria

5.3 Identify the problems that may hinder the

attainment of the “Lima Target’’

5.4 Suggest possible solutions to the problems

of 4.7

6

5.5 State the main features of Nigeria national

policy on technical education

5.6 Explain the structure of technical education

in Nigeria

5.7 List the roles of the different categories of

technical Personnel produced in 5.2 above viz.

or artisans, craftsman, technicians,

technologies engineers

5.8 Compare University programmes in

Engineering with those of polytechnics in

Nigeria

5.9 Explain the functions of National Board for

Technical Education (NBTE)

• Ask the students to classify

various schools offering

technical and engineering

progrmmes in Nigeria

36



hours/wk


General Objective 6.0: Understand the engineers roles and responsibilities in the community


7

6.1 State the rationale for Greeks and Romans

regarding Engineers as “Overspecialized

Cranks

6.2 State the rationale for the English Speaking

societies (America, Britain etc) which is

believed to have suffered from a “non-

Commutative syndrome and could not explain

the solution to their problems in English

• Ask the students to list

action by Nigerian Public that

indicate that poor

understanding of the

engineering profession.

- do -

8

6.3 State the rationale for every Tom, Duke and

Harry in Nigeria believing they can do the

projects which are usually Meant for engineers

6.4 List the various categories of contractors

registered in Nigeria to do engineering work

6.5 State why engineers don’t strike like

medical doctors for better remuneration at work

37



hours/wk


General Objective 7.0: Know all the Professional (Regulatory and Voluntary) in Engineering


9 - 10

7.1 Outline the social, moral and professional

responsibilities of the engineer in the society

7.2 Analyses proposals, target time and

strategies as these terms affects national

development plans in Nigeria

73 List the roles of the engineer in national

development and national defense.

7.4 List the working and professional

relationship of the engineer to the technologist,

the technician and the craftsman in the

execution of engineering contracts in Nigeria

7.5 State the ratios of engineers to technologist,

engineers to technician, Engineers to craftsmen

which are considered ideal for execution of

engineering jobs

7.6 Confirm the need for the engineer to head

engineering Establishments and lead

engineering projects.

• Ask the students to define

the jobs of craftsman,

technician, technologist and

engineers

- do -

General Objective 8.0: Know about the regulation and Control of Engineering Practice in Nigeria


11

8.1 List all the professional bodies in

Engineering in Nigeria

e.g. Council for the Regulation of Engineering

in Nigeria

(COREN) Nigerian Society of Engineers (NSE),

including all its Divisions and Institutes (e.g.

Mechanical, Chemical, Structural etc)

National Association of Technologist in

Engineering (NATE), Nigerian Society of

Engineering Technicians (NISET) and National

association of Engineering Craftsmen (NAEC)

• Ask the students to name

the activities of professional

bodies. especially in

engineering

• Hardbook of

registered

professional bodies.

• Chalkboard, Lecture

note

38



hours/wk


General Objective 8.0: Know about the regulation and Control of Engineering Practice in Nigeria


12

8.2 Explain the aims and objectives of each

body listed in 8.1 above

8.3 State the requirement for registration by the

regulatory body, COREN

8.4 State the requirements for corporate,

honorary graduate and student membership of

each society or association listed in 8.1 above

General Objective 9.0: Comprehend the concept “Transfer of Technology“


13

9.1 List the codes and Fundamental Ethical

principles and guiding the practice of

engineering

9.2 Outline the criteria for accreditation of

engineering

programmes of tertiary institutions

9.3 State the need for and purpose of the

Engineering Relations Monitoring (ERM)

programme of COREN e.g., elimination of

Quacks in engineering practices, etc

9.4 Outline the responsibilities of ERM

Inspectors and their role in creating jobs for

Nigerian Engineering Personnel

9.5 State the importance of COREN’s

Supervised Industrial Training Scheme In

Engineering (SITSIE) programme of the

Production of skilled and competent engineers

• Ask the students to outline

the used for controlling the

activities of professionals in

engineering.

- do -

39



hours/wk


General Objective 10.0: Comprehend the concept “Transfer of Technology”


14 - 15

10.1 Explain the Technology transfer concept

from the perspectives of the less advanced

countries and those of the advanced countries

10.2 Evaluate the advantages and

disadvantage of transfer of technology

10.3 State the problems and prospects of

technology transfer to Nigeria

10.4 Suggest possible alternatives to

technology transfer to Nigeria

10.5 Formulate a feasible plan for providing

Nigeria with

indigenous comprehensive know-how in

machine

plant/equipment design and manufacture by the

year 2010

• Ask the students to explain

how they believe technology

can be transferred

• Relevant text books,

• Chalkboard, Chalk,

• Lecture note

40

Entrepreneurship Development I

PROGRAMME: HIGER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE: ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I Course Code: SDV 210 Contact Hours:

3 Hours/WK


General Objective 1.0: Comprehend Private and state control of enterprise Week

Specific Learning Outcome: Teacher Activities Resources

1 - 5

1.1 Identify types of enterprises, sole proprietor,

limited liability, co-operative societies, public

corporation, partnership

1.2 Explain the objective of a business

organisation

1.3 Explain the business environment (e.g.

political, economics e.t.c.)

1.4 Examine private enterprises

1.5 Evaluate the public enterprise

1.6 Appraise the effect of private control of

business

1.7 Analyse the implications of state control of

enterprises

NOTE:- Treatment of 1.1

should include the structure,

functions, Advantages and

disadvantages of each type of

business Organisation

• Ask the students to identify types

of enterprises, sole proprietor,

limited liability, co-operative

societies, public corporation,

partnership


objective of a business organization


business environment (e.g. political,

economicse.t.c)

• Ask the students to examine

private enterprises

• Ask the students to evaluate the

public enterprise

• Ask the students to appraise the

effect of private control of business

• Ask the students to analyse the

implications of state control of

enterprises

• Chalk

• Blackboard

41



3 Hours/WK


General Objective: 2.0 Understand the methods of management


6 - 10

2.1 Define management

2.2 Explain the functions of management

planning, organizing, Controlling, staffing,

directing

2.3 Explain the Purpose of managing money,

men, material and machines

2.4 Examine the concept of authority and

responsibility

2.5 Appraise management by objectives

2.6 Analyse the roles of the chief Executive and

Board in policy Formulation and

implementation.

2.7 Explain motivation

2.8 Explain the concepts of theory X and Y

2.9 Evaluate the management control

2.10 Examine problems of leadership in

organization


management


function of management planning,

organizing, controlling, staffing, and

directing.


purpose of managing money, men,

material and business

• Ask the students to examine the

concept of authority and

responsibility

• Ask the students to appraise

management by objective

• Ask the students to analyse the

roles of the Chief Executive and

Board in policy formulation and

implementation

Ask the students to explain

motivation


concepts X and Y

• Ask the students to evaluate the

management control

• Ask the students to examine

problems of leadership in

organization

• Chalk

• Blackboard

42



3 Hours/WK


General Objective 3.0: Know elements of marketing


11 - 15

1 Define “marketing” and “market”

3.2 State the marketing mix-product, price,

place, promotion

3.3 Explain product differentiation

3.4 Explain the market segmentation

3.5 Differentiates the industrial market from the

consumer market

3.6 Define a Product

3.7 Identify the stages of product life cycle-

introductory, growth, maturity, decline

3.8 State the features of each stage in (3.7)

above

3.9 Describe the different ways a company can

develop a new product-e.g. improving the

existing products, seeking new products from

existing source inventing a new product


“Marketing “ and Market

• Ask the students to state the

marketing mix-product, price, place,

and promotion.


product differentiation

• Ask the students to explain market

segmentation


industrial market from the consumer

market

• Ask the students to define a

product

• Ask the students to identify the

stages of product lifecycle-

introductory, growth, maturity,

decline

• Ask the students to states the

features of each stage in (3.7)

above

• Chalk

• Blackboard

43

Engineering Design

Course: ENGINEERING DESIGN Course Code: MEC 312 Contact Hours: 3

Hrs/WK


General Objective 1.0: Know the sequence that lead to a workable design Week


1

1.1 Establish the need for a design

1.2 Describe the steps that make

up the sequence leading to a

workable designi.e. definition of a

problem, gathering of information,

concept of solutions evaluations of

solutions, modifications decision on

the best solution, communication of

the design

1.3 Describe phases involved in a

typical design project

1.4 Describe possibility solutions to

the design problem

• Ask students the need for a design

• Ask students the rudiments of a workable

design

• Ask students the list of the steps to take

in sequence to lead to a workable design

• Ask students to list and illustrate different

design specifications

• Ask students to list and describe the

phases involved in a typical design project

• Ask the students the principals of a good

design.

• Ask students the use of ergonomic and

anthropometic data in possible solutions to

the design problems.

• Ask students to present Design ideas

graphically

Recommended

textbooks,

Chalkboard, Chalk,

Lecture note.

44


Hrs/WK


General Objective 2.0: Know the factors that influence the selection of materials and manufacturing

processes in a particular design


2

2.1 Specify the physical and

mechanical properties of materials

relevant to the design

2.2 Outline the steps in the

selection of an appropriate material

2.3 Classify manufacturing

processes into eight categories i.e.

casting, deformation, machining,

joining, heat treatment and surface

treatment assembly

• Ask students to specify the physical and

mechanical properties of materials

relevant to a design

• Ask students to analyse material

requirements for a design

• Ask students to identify and screen

alternative materials for a design

• Ask students to evaluate the materials for

design

• Ask students to select materials in terms

of performance, cost, fabricability, and

availability

• Ask students to develop the design data

for critical application

• Ask students to describe casting

• Ask students to describe deformation

machining

• Ask students to describe joining

• Ask students to describe heat treatment

• Ask students to describe assembly

• Ask students to design taking into

consideration above attributes.

3

2.1 Select the most appropriate

manufacturing process considering

cost factors as materials utilization

factor, effect of method of materials

properties and subsequent

performance of the part in service

2.2 Carry out simple project on

selection of material and

manufacturing process for a real

life problem

• Ask the students to select materials

considering the following factors as it

affect the most appropriate manufacturing

process chosen

• costs (b)effect of method of material

properties.

• Ask students to relate these to

performance of the part in service

• Ask students to carry out simple project

on selection of material and manufacturing

process for a real life problem

45


Hrs/WK


General Objective 3.0: Understand the process in estimating cost of design


4

3.1 Identify the three basic product

costs as it relates to Design for

economic manufacture

3.2 Breakdown a product cost into

the various cost stages that exist in

an organization

3.3 Compare projected production

costs with the expected income

from a realistic selling price using a

breakdown chart

• Ask students to identify and describe

material costs


labour costs


overhead costs

• Ask students to relate these to a real life

problem

• Ask students to breakdown a product

cost into various cost stages for real life

organizations

• Ask students to compare projected

production costs with the expected income

for a realistic selling price using a break-

even chart for real life organizations

5

3.4 Describe some methods by

which thought design may reduce

the overall product costi.e.

economic choice of production

technique, material and design

form, avoiding material wastage,

consideration for size and product,

efficient use of standard

components and bought-out items

designing to aid packaging

3.5 Carry out exercises in cost

estimation

• Ask the students to apply thought design

to aid packaging for several different

situations

• Ask students to carry out cost estimate

for several designs

46


Hrs/WK


General Objective 4.0: Know how to analyse the alternative solution concepts


6 - 9

4.1 List four factors that are used to

analyse alternative solutionsi.e.

technical, economic human, legal

and environmental factors

4.2 State criteria for evaluating a

given design

4.3 Explain the need for and

purpose of considering each one of

the factors in 4.1 above

4.4 Explain the role of models in

engineering design

4.5 Classify test models into

quantitative and qualitative (i.e.

mathematical equations)

• Ask the students to analyse alternative

solutions to a design taking into

consideration the following factors: (a)

technical (b) economic (c) human (d) legal

and environmental

• Ask the students to list and describe the

criteria for evaluating a given design

• Ask the students to explain the need for

and purpose of each of the following in

consideration of alternative solution to a

design (a) technical (b) economic (c)

human (d) legal (e) environmental

• Ask the students to apply the following

models to an engineering design process

• Sales models (b) layout models

• (c) Aesthetic/ergonomic models (d) test

models

• Ask students to develop mathematical

equations depicting quantitative and

qualitative test models in an engineering

design process

47

Course: ENGINEERING DESIGN Course Code: MEC 312 Contact Hours: 3 Hrs/WK


General Objective 4.0: Know how to analyse the alternative solution concepts


10 -

11

4.6 Test and evaluate against

specification for a design

4.7 Test designs against factor of

safety

• Ask students to test and evaluate against specification for a design • Ask students to test design against factor of safety. • Ask students to present design ideas graphically • Ask the students to design taking into consideration attributes of casting deformation machining, joining, heat treatment, surface treatment and assembly. • Ask the students to carry out a simple project on selection of material and manufacturing process for a real life problem • Ask the students to design taking into consideration materials costs, labor cost and overhead costs. • Ask the students to apply thought design to aid packaging for different situations • Ask the students to carry out cost estimation for different designs

12 -

15

• Ask the students to analyse alternative solutions to a design taking into consideration the following factors: • Technical (b) economic (c) human (d) legal and environmental • Ask the students to evaluate a given design • Ask the students to apply the following models to an engineering design process:

(a) Sales models (b) Layout models (c) Aesthetic/ergonomic models (d) test models

• Ask students to test and evaluate a design against specifications • Ask students to test designs against factors of safety

48

Technical Report Writing II


Course: TECHNICAL REPORT

WRITING II Course Code: Contact Hours 2HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Know the procedure for writing project reports Week


1 - 7

1.1 Explain the characteristics

of a project report, viz - parts,

format, style

1.2 Select a suitable topic for

a project report

1.3 Explain methods of

gathering data from primary,

secondary and tertiary

sources

1.4 Use reference materials

for gathering data

1.5 Use appropriate citation

and documentation styles,e.g

APA, MLA, etc



necessary


characteristics of a project, viz - parts,

formate, style, and select a suitable topic

for a project report

• Ask the students to explain methods of

gathering data from primary, secondary

and tertiary sources and also use

reference materials for gathering data

• Recommended textbook,

chalkboard, chalk, lecture

notes, etc.

8 - 15

1.6 Explain the procedure for

writing a project report

1.7 Write an outline of a

project report using

appropriate numbering,

ranking and phrasing.

1.8 Write a project report

• Ask the students to use appropriate

citation and documentation stylese.g APA,

MLA, etc


procedure for writing a project report and

write an outline of a project report using

appropriate numbering, ranking and

phrasing

• Ask the students to write a project report


49

Business Management

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE: BUSINESS MANAGEMENT CODE: MEC 321

CONTACT

HOURS:2

HRS/WK

General Objective 1.0: Company Structures Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teachers Activities Resource

1

1.1 Relationship between internal need and

external links in developing structure

1.2 Levels of authority

1.3 Supply chain relationship

• Ask students to produce the

organizational structure of a small

local company and compare it to

the polytechnic

• Assess.

• Chalk,

Chalkboard,

• Lecture note

General Objective: 2.0: Marketing


2-3

2.1 Role of marketing - match capability to

customer need

2.2 Product mix - product, place, price,

promotion, people, process and physical

evidence. Attribute analysis and customer

perceived value

2.3 Product life cycles.

2.4 Distribution channels

• Ask students to identify an

imported product and its local

competition. Prepare and attribute

analysis to show gap analysis.

• Assess.

General Objective: 3.0 Market Research


4-6

3.1 Forcasting

3.2 Sampling plan - brief, target, question,

analysis

• Ask student to determine future

demand for a produce and

product and produce a customer

perception questionnaire.

• Assess

General Objective: 4.0 Market strategy


7-10

4.1 Supply position and customer preference

4.2 Ansoffs Matrix - market

penetration/development, product development,

diversification.

4.3 Strategy - segmentation and co-operation

• Ask student to analyse local

company for skills, capacity and

competence and develop a

market strategy

• Assess

50

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE: BUSINESS MANAGEMENT CODE: MEC 321

CONTACT

HOURS:2

HRS/WK

General Objective: 5.0 Investment Appraisal


11-12

5.1 Payback period

5.1 Annual rate of return

5.2 Discounted Cash-Flow

5.3 Time & risks

• Ask student to compare a

project’s costs & income under at

least two methods and comment

on risks involved.

• Assess

General Objective: 6.0 Variance Analysis


13-14

6.1 Marginal costing - contribution analysis and

breakeven analysis

6.2 Standard/estimated costs

6.3 Analysis of actual: expected

• Ask student to analyse local

company

• Demand

General Objective: 7.0 Contracts


15

7.1 Law of contract

7.2 Terms

7.3 Remedies

7.4 Liability - Torts and strict liability

51

Operations Management

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - MANAGEMENT

(OPTION)

COURSE: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT COURSE CODE: MEM 414

CONTACT

HOURS:

3HRS/WK

COURSE SPECIFICATION: THEORETICAL CONTENT

General Objective 1.0 Competitive Profile Week


1

1.1 Market qualifying criteria: Time, quality,

Delivery, Price, Flexibility, Design features,

Pre/post sales relationship

1.2 Order winning/Losing criteria, Gaining

competitive advantage Customer & Supplier

dependence

• Ask students to produce a profile of

a customer’s needs to determine

Order Winning Criteria and produce

plan to give competitive advantage.

• Assess

• Chalk,

Chalkboard,

lecture note etc.

General Objective 2.0: Capacity Planning


2

2.1 Need for capacity plan along time

horizons

2.2 Calculating capacity - ideal, actual

achievable and maximum

2.3 Methods of adjusting capacity to match

demand

• Ask students to prepare capacity

profile and set against a demand

pattern to determine efficient match.

• Assess

- do -

General Objective 3.0: Material Management


4

3.1 Inventory management systems - EBQ,

Periodic replacement, Part-period balancing

2.1 MRP Systems - Bills of material

(common & unique parts), Master

production planning, exploding,

amalgamating and off-setting to produce

time phased order raising. Reports available

• Ask student to determine best

system to meet variable demand

pattern.

• Ask student to operate a simple,

multi-product MRP System against a

variable demand

• Assess

- do -

52

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - MANAGEMENT

(OPTION)

COURSE: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT COURSE CODE: MEM 414

CONTACT

HOURS:

3HRS/WK


General Objective 4.0: Scheduling


5

4.1 Simple one/two machine scheduling

4.2 Capacity Requirement Planning - load

profiles & utilizing warehousing

4.3 Bottleneck scheduling

• Ask students to develop load

profile of simple Master production

Plan & re-schedule to meet

customer requirement.

• Ask students to detail schedule

multi-machines against demand

• Assess.

- do -

General Objective 5.0: Layout Planning


5.1 Types of layout

5.2 Systematic Layout Planning (SLP)

5.3 Cellular Layout - Production Flow

Analysis (PFA)

• Ask students to carry out a SLP

exercise.

• Ask students to determine match of

machine to cell using PFA. Assess

- do -

General Objective 6.0: Just-in-time (JIT)


6

6.1 Principles of JIF - Work-in-progress

reduction, management-by-sight, Multi-

skilling zero defects, preventative

maintenance.

6.2 Kanban system

6.3 Set-up Reduction

• Ask students to rearrange

manufacturing system to incorporate

JIT principles.

• Assess

- do -

General Objective 7.0: Lean & Agile Manufacturing


7

7.1 Lean Manufacturing

7.2 Time compression

7.3 Agile Manufacturing

• Ask students to produce report on

local manufacturer to show how to

move towards lean or agile

manufacturing

• Assess

- do -

53

Quality Assurance


COURSE: QUALITY ASSURANCE

Course Specification: Theoretical COURSE CODE: MEC 427 CONTACT HOURS:

3HR/WK

General Objective 1.0 Need for Quality Week


1

1.1 Customer need - conformity

& reliability

1.3 Internal need - cost & time

compression

1.4 Concurrent engineering

• Ask student to develop a customer quality

profile for a product

• Assess

• Chalk, Chalkboard,

• Lecture note

General Objective 2.0: Capacity


2-3

2.1 Variability

2.2 Capability index - CP & CPK

2.3 Using & reducing indices

• Ask students to carry out an exercise in

capability analysis

• Assess

• Range of

measuring

instruments

General Objective 3.0 Statistical Process Control


4-7

3.1 Sampling

2.2 Variables - producing mean

and range charts

2.3 Attributes - producing number

and percentage defective charts.

• Ask students to produce and analyse

mean and range charts

• Assess

• Range of

measuring

instruments

General Objective 4.0: Problem Solving


8-9

4.1 Pereto analysis

4.1 Fishbone diagrams and

brainstorming

4.2 Correlation & measles charts.

• Ask students to carry out a Pereto analysis

of a poor quality product and determine

probable causes.

• Assess

- do -

General Objective 5.0 Certification


10-11

5.1 ISO 9000

5.2 Vendor assessment

5.3 CE Certification

• Ask students to examine a local

manufacturer under either ISO 9000 or

vendor assessment scheme.

• Assess

- do -

54


COURSE: QUALITY ASSURANCE

Course Specification: Theoretical COURSE CODE: MEC 427 CONTACT HOURS:

3HR/WK

General Objective 6.0 Value Engineering


12-13

6.1 Functional analysis

6.2 Cost analysis

6.3 Comparison matrix & idea

development

• Ask students to carry out a value analysis

of a locally produced product

• Assess

- do -

General Objective 7.0: Improving Reliability


14-15

7.1 Simple reliability concepts

7.2 Fault Tree Analysis

7.3 Failure mode analysis -

FMEA & FMECA

• Ask students to develop a FTA or FMEA

analysis of a locally produced product.

• Assess

- do -

55

Transport Management

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING: (PLANT ENGINEERING

OPTION)

COURSE: TRANSPORT MANAGEMENT COURSE CODE: MEP 422 CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 1.0: Road Transport Legislation Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teachers Activities Resources.

1-3

1.1 Legislation regarding vehicle

classification

1.2 HGV testing and other legislative

requirements

1.3 Carriage of toxic and dangerous

materials

1.4 Ancillary handling equipment

• Ask students to produce a matrix of

a transport company’s legal test

requirements

• Assess

General Objective 2.0: Workshop equipment


4-6

2.1 Workshop layout

2.2 Basic workshop equipment

2.3 Basic fuel dispensing equipment

2.4 Ancillary power needs

• Ask students to compare a street-

side car mechanic with a properly

equipped workshop

• Assess

General Objective 3.0: Warehouse Operations


7-10

3.1 Location of warehouses

3.2 Layout of warehouses

3.3 Material handling equipment: Fork lift,

trucks, hoists and cranes

3.4 Pallet handling & storage systems

3.5 Bulk handling

3.6 Loading and Stowing of cargo

• Ask student to design a

warehouse, including layout and

storage system.

• Assess

General Objective 4.0: Transport Service Operations


11-13

4.1 Fuel storage and issue

4.2 Servicing

4.3 Accident & other repairs

4.4 Parts section

• Ask student to design part of

required procedures

• Assess

56


OPTION)

COURSE: TRANSPORT MANAGEMENT COURSE CODE: MEP 422 CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 5.0: Transport Management


14-15

5.1 Determining transport and storage

needs

5.2 Workshop administration: Vehicle

receipt, Workshop instructions, Cost

calculations and invoicing procedure.

• Ask student to cost out a repair

operation.

• Assess.

57

Maintenance Management

PROPROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - PLANT

ENGINEERING (OPTION)

COURSE: MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT COURSE CODE: MEP 423 CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,2)

General Objective 1.0: Types of Maintenance. Week


1-2

1.1 Need: Efficiency, life, legal (Health

& Safety & Environmental

1.2 Type: Planned, preventive,

predicative, scheduled, correctives,

breakdown, replacement.

1.1 Monitoring

• Ask students to examine a range of

plant and produce a schedule for simple

maintenance tasks and examinations.

• Assess.

General Objective 2.0: Maintenance causes: Identification and reduction


3-6

a. Wear and Tear

b. Fatigue and other

stresses

c. Corrosion

d. Operational

damage

e. Operational neglect

and misuse

f. Inappropriate

design or selection,

especially of

maintainability


plant and produce a fault tree analysis

showing causes of deterioration

• Assess

General Objective 3.0: Predicting faults


7-10

3.1 Identifying faults

3.2 Predicting remaining life

3.3 Manufactures’ data


common faults and produce a means of

identifying these faults commencing or

happening

• Assess

58

PROPROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - PLANT


COURSE: MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT COURSE CODE: MEP 423 CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,2)

General Objective 4.0: Maintenance procedures


11-13

4.1 Preparing procedures

4.2 Preparing detailed instructions

4.3 Data collection and analysis

4.4 Plant maintenance schedule,

including regulation compliance

4.5 Staff scheduling

• Ask students to develop some

procedures and instructions including

operation of simple maintenance task,

and develop a suitable history record

sheet.

• Assess

PC with

spreadsheet and

data base

General Objective 5.0: Maintenance Strategy


14-15

5.1 Effectiveness measures,

availability, cost and hazard

prevention

5.1 Training - operator and

serviceman

5.2 Evaluating maintenance plans

5.3 Spare parts requirements

• Ask students to justify a planned

maintenance schedule,

• Assess

• PC with

spreadsheet

59

COMPUTER AND ELECTRICAL COURSES CAD/CAM


COURSE: CAD/CAM COURSE CODE: MEC 316 CONTACT HOURS:

4HRS/WK

General Objective 1.0: Know 3D Component Drawing Week


1-4

1.1 Use geometric manipulation

functions such as mirror,

1.2 Explain drawing attributes for

CAD/CAM with specific reference

to profile data and parts listing.

• Ask students to produce a 3D

component

• Assess

• PC with 3D CAD

package

General Objective 2.0: Produce a 3D Surface


5-8

2.1 Use of axis to produce suitable

geometry

2.2 Produce a variety of geometric

shapes from datum in 3D space.

• Ask students to produce 3D surfaces

for visualization and subsequent

machining

• Assess

• PC with 3D CAD

package

General Objective 3.0: Data Transfer


9-10

3.1 Structure CAD data with

reference to datum and direction

3.2 Transfer data in DYF an IGES

• Ask students to produce a DXF file

from CAD and then use this DXF file

to produce geometry in CAM software

• Assess

• PC with 3D CAD & CAM

package

General Objective 4.0: Cutter Paths


11-13

4.1 Generate simulated tool cutting

paths

4.2 Consider cut direction, work

holding, accuracy and finish

4.3 Use of canned and repetitive

cycle sub-routines.

• Ask students to develop tool paths

for a variety of profiles and optimize

time.

• Assess

• PC with CAM package

60


COURSE: CAD/CAM COURSE CODE: MEC 316 CONTACT HOURS:

4HRS/WK

General Objective 5.0: General Machine tool program/tape


14-15

5.1 Generate machine program

5.2 Use manual data input to enter

offsets and vary cutting conditions

5.3 Prove tape

• Ask students to produce machine

program, transfer to machine and

produce component to requirements

• Assess.

• PC with CAM and post -

Processor package CNC

Machine tool PC

61

CNC: Programming & Robotics


COURSE: PROGRAMMING & ROBOTICS COURSE CODE: MEC 416 CONTACT HOURS:

3HRS/WK

General Objective 1.0: Manual Part Programming Week


1-5

1.1 Elements & structure- tooling

information, parameter settings,

datum’s and axes, positional control

& sequencing

1.2 ISO standards, machine codes

for machine auxiliary functions and

movement, sequencing.

1.3 Techniques: macro routines and

sub routines, offsets

• Ask students to produce manually

written part programs and then to input

into CNC machine tool and prove out

• Assess

• CNC Machine tool

General Objective 2.0: Computer Assisted Part Programming


6 - 9

2.1 Functions: Profile definition,

graphics geometry manipulation,

tooling & machine sequences, cutter

path simulation

2.2 Database: Profiles, attributes,

material cutting data, tool data

2.3 Macro routines: continuous

operations, auto-tooling standard

components.

• Ask students to develop tool paths for

a variety of profiles and optimize time,

then to produce machine program,

transfer to machine and prove program.

• Assess

• PC with 3D CAM

and post-processor

package, CNC

machine

General Objective 3.0: Industrial Robots


10 - 12

3.1 Manipulator elements: drive

systems, sensors, brakes and

counter balances

3.2 Control elements

3.3 Intelligence: Proximity, range,

position force

3.4 Sources of error

• Ask students to examine various

products and determine suitable robot

specification to accurately position in an

assembly operation.

• Asses

• Robot

62


COURSE: PROGRAMMING & ROBOTICS COURSE CODE: MEC 416 CONTACT HOURS:

3HRS/WK

General Objective 4.0: Programming Robots


13 - 15

4.1 Programming methods: Task

programming, manual data input,

teach, explicit and goal directed

programming

4.2 Facilities: Loops, shifts, external

communication, canned cycles, off-

sets, macro and sub routines

4.1 Industrial tasks

4.2 Proving programme

4.3 Safety

• Ask students to develop robot paths

for a variety of operations, then to

produce manual programs

• Before programming robot to carry out

a simple task and prove program

• Assess

• Robot

63

Computer Programming

PROGRAMME: INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY (ICT)

Course: COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Course Code: ICT 101 Contact Hours:

4hrs/wk

Course Objectives 1.0: To give the students the skill needed to appreciate the use of computers and the use

of specialist software Packages in a competent manner, within their own engineering specialty. The learning

Methodology should be student centered, with the student using various available packages in order to be

competent when using them. The use of student workbooks or guided learning materials is recommended.

Key Objectives: The outcome from the learning process should be that the student would be able to do the

following.

Week Specific Learning Outcome Teachers Activities Resource

1

Define what is meant by a computer.

Know the history of computer

development (briefly)

State the uses of computers and

understand the impact of the

PC on computer technology.

Differentiate between hardware and

software

Understand the input-process-output

algorithm (hardware)

a. Central processor

b. Input mechanisms

c. Output

mechanisms

• Define what is meant by a Computer?

• Teach the history of Computers

developments. (Briefly)

• Teach the uses of computers and the

impact of PC on the society: home, office,

banks etc.

• Maximum of 4

students to 1

computer

• Maximum of 4

computers to a

printer except when

a Network is in use.

• 1 Ream of A4

papers to 10

students.

• Ink cartridges per

printer per

semester.

2

Know how data is stored

a. RAM

b. ROM

c. Fixed discs

d. Removable discs

Understand the concept of an

operating system

a. PC-DOS/MS-DOS

b. Windows

c. Linux

d. Unix

• Explain the need for data storage.

Dismantle a computer system and show

the students the RAM card, the Hard Disk

and the Processors.

• Explain the concept of an operating

system.

64



4hrs/wk






following.


3

Access computers correctly through

Windows operating system.

a. Open/Close a

window

b. Program Manager

c. Button bars/scroll

bars/menu bars

d. Moving from one

window to another

• Discuss the advantage of the Windows

Operating System.

• Explain the windows menu and tools.

Each student must be given an

opportunity to start a computer,

open/close the window operating system,

understand the program manager and

move around in the windows environment.

-Do-

a. Understand file

management and

how to manage files

b. Creating a file and

folder

c. Manipulating files

(moving, copying,

saving, deleting)

d. Print manager

• Explain the process of creating a file,

manipulating the file and use of the print

manager.

-Do-

4

Understand the concept of a software

package

a. MS Office

b. Lotus SmartSuite

c. MS Encarta

• Load MS Office with the students and

explain the various packages that make

up MS Office. Load MS Encarta and

discuss its use with the students.

-Do-

65



4hrs/wk






following.


5-6

Demonstrate ability in the competent

use of a word-processing package

such as MS Word (or equivalent

standard)

a. Entering text

b. Formatting text

(emboldening, font

size, italicising)

c. Creating and

Saving text files

d. Editing and

moving text

e. Importing objects

f. Spelling and

Grammar Checking

g. Creating and

manipulating tables,

text boxes, equations

h. Printing

• Demonstrate the installation of MS

Words.

• Identify the different features of the

software.

• Ask students to type a short document

and save it.

• Ask students to edit a document and

carry out a spelling check.

• Demonstrate the use of tables.

66



4hrs/wk






following.


7-8


use of a graphics package such as

Corel Draw (or equivalent standard)

a. Drawing tools

b. Text as graphics

c. Creating and

saving image files

d. Editing and

moving images

e. Importing and

exporting graphics

f. Windows

‘Clipboard’ facility

g. Creating and

manipulating images

(re-sizing etc)

h. Image file

standard (JPEG,

PCX, GIF etc)

i. Printing

• Load Corel Draw.

• Explain features of the soft wares.

• Demonstrate the creating and saving of

images.

• Edit the images saved.

• Export the graphics to other packages

• Demonstrate the manipulation (re-sizing)

of images.

67



4hrs/wk






following.


9-11


use of a spreadsheet package such

as MS Excel (or equivalent

standard).

a. Setting up the

worksheet

b. Entering data

c. Formatting data

(decimal places,

alpha-numeric)

d. Creating and

saving worksheets

e. Creating a formula

in cells

f. Importing objects

g. Exporting the

worksheet

h. Creating and

manipulating

graphical

representations of

data

i. Printing

• Load MS Excel.

• Explain features of the software.

• Create a worksheet and edit it.

• Demonstrate how to format a workshop.

68



4hrs/wk






following.


12-13


use of a database package such as

MS Access (or equivalent standard)

a. Drawing tools

b. Text as graphics

c. Creating & saving

image files

d. Editing & moving

images

e. Importing &

exporting graphics

f. Windows

‘Clipboard’ facility

g. Creating &

manipulating images

(re-sizing etc)

h. Image file

standards (JPEG,

PCX, GIF etc)

i. Printing

• Load MS Access.

• Explain the features and working of the

software.

• Use students record as example and

enter the records in the structure query

modify and produce typical report.

• Show how to index and sort files in

alphabetical order

69



4hrs/wk






following.


14-15

Use the Internet to retrieve

information.

a. World Wide Web

(WWW)

b. Download

information

c. Paste retrieved

information into an

appropriate

application

d. Use e-mail to send

and receive

messages.

e. National and

international e-mail

f. E-mail attachments

(sending & receiving)

• Show students how to look on to the

Internet.

• Write and send an email.

• Surf the net.

70

Electrical Power And Machines


Course: ELECTRICAL POWER AND

MACHINES Course Code: EEE442 Contact Hours 2HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Understand the principles of electrical machines and electro-mechanical

energy conversion Week


1

1.1 State the principles of

induction and alignment as

applied electrical machines

1.2 Explain with the aid of

sketches how the principles in

1.1 are applied to electrical

machines

1.3 State the motor energy

conversion principles

1.4 Derive the general energy

balance equation applicable to

all situations

1.5 Represent by suitable

block diagrams the energy

balance equations

1.6 Derive induced voltage and

the electrical input in singly

excited systems

1.7 Derive and expression for

energy in the magnetic field of

a singly excited system

1.8 Derive the energy balance

equation

1.9 Develop the dynamic

equation of a singly excited

electro-mechanical system

1.10 Solve problems involving

1.4 to 1.9



necessary


• state the principles of induction,

interaction and alignment as applied to

electrical machines

• Carryout the activities in 1.2 to 1.5



• carryout the activities in 1.6 to 1.10

• determine experimentally the conversion

of energy in singly excited system


• Recommended



• Recommended

equipment for

experiment

71





General Objective 2.0: Understand the performance of various types of AC machines


2.1 Describe the construction of single-phase and three-phase transformers 2.2 Explain the working principles of the transformer 2.3 Explain the phasor diagram for a transformer on no-load, on-bad conditions 2.4 Explain the equivalent circuit of a transformer 2.5 Describe the construction of a synchronous machine 2.6 Sketch the flux and emf waves in synchronous machines 2.7 Explain armature reaction and leakage fluxes and reactances 2.8 Explain synchronous reactance and synchronous impedance 2.9 Sketch the equivalent circuit of synchronous machine 2.10 Sketch phasor diagrams for a synchronous machine operating as a motor or a generator 2.11 Explain open-circuit and shot circuit characteristics of a synchronous machine 2.12 Explain steady-state operating characteristics of a synchronous machine 2.13 Describe the construction of an induction machine 2.14 Explain the principle of operation of an induction machine 2.15 Define synchronous speed, rotor speed and slip 2.16 Explain the equivalent circuit for an induction machine 2.17 Explain the torque/slip characteristics of an induction machine 2.18 Explain the various methods of cooling electric machine


• describe the construction of single-phase

and three-phase transformers

• carryout the activities of 2.2 to 2.7

• determine experimentally the copper and

iron losses in transformer

• connect three single-phase transformers

for three phase operation

• Assess the student

• Ask the student to:

• explain synchronous reactance and

synchronous impedance

• carryout the activities in 2.11 to 2.18

• determine experimentally the open-circuit

and shot circuit characteristics of a

synchronous machines

• determine experimentally the

synchronous speed, rotor speed and slip of

an induction motor

• explain the torque/slip characteristics of

an induction machine, and the various

methods of cooling electric machine

• determine experimentally the torque/slip

characteristics of an induction motor


• Recommended

equipment for

experiment

72





General Objective 3.0: Understand the principles of operation of various types of electric power

plants


3.1 State the various sources of energy 3.2 Explain the essential principles of hydro and steam power station design 3.3 Explain the principles of operation of:

i. steam power plant ii. hydro power plant iii. gas turbine plant iv. nuclear power plant v. wind power plant vi. solar power plant

3.4 Draw the flow diagram of a thermal power plant 3.5 Explain the factors which influence the choice of site for a steam generating station 3.6 State the advantages and disadvantages of the gas turbine over the steam turbine plant 3.7 List the operational features of a diesel engine generator 3.8 State the various type of water turbines in use 3.9 Draw a schematic diagram for the electricity supply to auxiliaries of a steam power station


• state various sources of energy, and

explain the principles of operations of all

the power plants as indicated in 3.3

• draw the flow diagram of a thermal power

plant and explain the factors which

influence the choice of site for a steam

generating station



• do the activities in 3.6 to 3.8 and draw a

good schematic diagram for the electricity

supply to auxiliaries of a steam power

station

• select a water turbine for state conditions


73





General Objective 4.0: Understand the basic principles involved in electricity supply


10-11

4.1 Sketch a single line

diagram of a typical power

system

4.2 Differentiate between

transmission and distribution

4.3 Compare radial and inter-

connected power transmission

systems

4.4 State typical conductor

sizes and their power limits

4.5 Explain the mechanism of

power transfer

4.6 Explain reactive power and

power factor

4.7 Explain various types of

power system faults

Ask the students to sketch a single line

diagram of a typical power system, and

also carryout the activities in 4.2 to 4.7

Assess the student

Ask the students to:

calculate symmetrical 3-phase fault MVA

at various points of simple systems,

explain methods of power factor

improvement and solve problems on power

factor improvement

demonstrate practically P.F improvement

of an electrical system using(i) capacitor

banks(ii) synchronous machine

Assess the students

12

4.8 Calculate symmetrical 3-

phase fault MVA at various

points of simple systems

4.9 Explain method of power

factor improvement

4.10 Solve problems on power

factor improvement

74





General Objective: 5.0 understand the principles of system protection and earthing


5.1 State the requirements of a

protective schemes

5.2 List components of

protective schemes

5.3 Explain the various

methods of protection of

systems, (overcurrent,

distance, differential relaying)

5.4 Explain methods of

protecting transmission lines,

generators, transformers and

busbars

5.5 State the purpose of

earthing

5.6 State the various types of

practical earth electrodes

5.7 Explain with the aid of

sketch, various methods of

system earthing

5.8 Explain equipment earth

5.9 Explain bonding of

equipment and cables

5.10 Describe a method of

measuring earth electrode

resistance and earth loop

impedance

5.11 Explain protective

multiple earthing

5.12 Describe a method of

substation earthing.


• state the requirements, list components

of protective schemes and explain the

various methods of protection of systems

• explain the methods of protecting

transmission lines, generators,

transformers and busbars, state the

purpose of earthing and explain with the

aid of sketch, various methods of system

earthing

• state the various types of practical earth

electrodes

• explain equipment earth, bonding of

equipment and cables and also describe a

method of measuring earth electrode

resistance and earth loop impedance

• explain protective multiple earthing, and

describe a method of substation earthing

• determine experimentally earth

resistance of an electrical system at

various locations


75





General Objective 6.0: Understand motor selection and speed control


15

6.1 List various types of

electric machine enclosures

6.2 Explain the rating of

electric machines

6.3 Explain the procedure for

selecting electric motor for an

application

6.4 Explain methods of speed

control of electric motors

6.5 Motor Selection and speed

control


• list various types of electric machine

enclosures and explain the rating of

electric machines

• explain the procedure for selecting

electric motor for an application and

explain methods of speed control of

electric motors

• determine experimentally various speeds

of electric motors using appropriate speed

control


76

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING COURSES Strength of Materials I

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - MANUFACTURING

(OPTION)

Course: Strength of Materials I Course Code: MEC 313 Contact Hours: 1-1-0


General Objective 1.0: Understand the concept of stress, strain, Hook’s law, and elastic constant (E,

G, K) Week


1.1 Define stress and strain

1.2 State Hook’s law

• Ask the student to define stress

and strain. Illustrate with example

and diagrams and make notes.

• Ask the student to state Hook’s law

General Objective 2.0: Understand the relationship between the elastic constants the concept of

strain energy and stresses in composite bars


1 - 3

2.1 Describe the relationship

between the elastic constant E, G,

and K

2.2 Explain the concept of strain

energy

2.3 Evaluate stress in composite

bars

• Ask the students to determine the

relationship between the elastic

constant E, G, and K


concept of strain energy.

• Ask the student to evaluate

stresses in composite bars

General Objective 3.0: Understand the concept of compatibility equation, the concept of stress-strain

relationship in 2-dimensions


3.1 Explain the compatibility

equation

3.2 Define stress and strain

relationship in 2- dimensions

• Ask the student to explain

compatibility equation

77





General Objective 4.0: Understand the type of stresses and strains developed in thick walled

pressure vessels and cylinder


4 - 5

4.1 Evaluate principal stresses

strain and planes

4.2 Find principal stresses using

the mohr’s circles.

• Ask the students to define the

stress and strain relationship in two

dimensions.

• Ask the students to evaluate

principal stresses, strains and planes

General Objective 5.0: Understand the construction of shearing force and bending moment diagrams

and the computation of shearing force and bending Moment


6

5.1 Derive the types of stress in

pressurized cylinder shells

5.2 Compare Hoop and

longitudinal stresses


types of stresses in pressurized

cylindrical shells

General Objective 6.0: Understand the theory of bending


7 - 8

6.1 Derive the stress in thin

spherical shells

6.2 Analyze the dimensional

changes caused by internal

pressure

Ask the student to compare hoop

and longitudinal stresses


stress in thin spherical shells

• Ask the student to analyze the

dimensional changes caused by

internal pressure

General Objectives 7.0: Understand the theory of torsion


8

7.1 Distinguish between Thick and

thin cylinders

7.2 Illustrate stress variations over

the cross-section of the cylinder

• Ask the students to distinguish

between thick and thin cylinder.

Illustrate with diagrams and make

notes.

Recommended textbooks,

chalk, chalkboard, lecture

notes.

9 - 10

• Ask the student to illustrate

between variations over the cross

section of the cylinder

78





General Objective 8.0: Understand the use of portable strain meter and universal cantilever

apparatus.


11 - 12

8.1 Describe the longitudinal, radial

and circumferential stresses and

strains for a thick cylinder

8.2 Explain the relationship

between stress and strain values in

thin cylinders with those of thick

cylinder

• Ask the student to determine the

longitudinal, radial and

circumferential stresses and strains

for a thick cylinder

• Ask the student to compare stress

and strain values in thin and thick

cylinder

General Objective 9.0: Understand the use of thin cylinder apparatus of thick cylinder apparatus


13 - 15

9.1 Construct shearing force and

bending moment diagrams

9.2 Solve problems on bending

stresses

9.3 Calculate polar moment of area

9.4 Relate Shear strain to the

angle of twist

9.5 Derive the torsion equation

9.6 Calculate torsional strain

energy

9.7 Carryout revisions

• Ask the student to construct

shearing force and bending

moments diagrams

• Ask the student to solve problems

on bending stresses.

• Ask the student to calculate polar

moment of area

• Ask the student to relate shear

strain to the angle of twist


equation

• Ask the student to calculate

torsional strain energy

• Ask the student to ask questions

on all areas of difficulties.

79

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MACHANICAL ENGINEERING - MANUFACTURING

(OPTION)

Course: Strength of Materials I Course Code: MEC 313 Contact Hours: 1-0-1

Course Specification: Practical Content

General Objective: Demonstrate skills in the use of portable strain meter, cantilever, thin thick

cylinder apparatus Week


1-5

1.0 Perform an experiment to

demonstrate strain with

- Extensometer

- Electrical

Resistance strain

Gauges

- Simple strain

gauges.

• Demonstrate activities in 1.0 to

6.0 for the students to learn and

ask them to carry out all the

activities.


• Extensometer

• Electrical Resistance strain

gauges

• Tensile/compression Testing

machine (140 tones) etc.

6- 9

2.0 Carry out the following test

- Tensile test

- Compression

test

- Hardness test

- Impact test

10 3.0 Perform experiment to

demonstrate universal cantilever.

11 4.0 Carryout experiment to test for

strength of Beams

12

5.0 Carry out experiment to test

for strength of Thin and thick

cylinder.

13 - 15 6.0 Test for torsional stress/strain

of cylindrical bar.

80

Instrumentation and Control


(OPTION)

COURSE: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Course Code: MEC 314 Contact Hours: 1hr/wk

(1-0-2)

Course Specification: Theoretical Content:

General Objective 1.0: Understand the general characteristics of measuring instruments and

measurements. Week


1

1.1 Classify instruments into typesi.e. indicating, recording and controlling instruments. 1.2 Explain the factors affecting instrument selection e.g. accuracy, precision, resolution sensitivity, and range, reliability, cost, static and dynamic response, environment and type of output. 1.3 Classify the sources of errors in measurement systems into manufacturing errors, design error, operating errors, environmental errors and application errors.1.4 Define and explain the importance of calibration. 1.5 Explain the importance of basic components of an instrument system such as sensing elements, amplifying elements, signal modifiers or converters display

• Ask students to explain

factors for the choice of

measuring and measuring

instruments.

• Ask students to explain how

to ascertain accuracy of

measurement reading from

instruments.

• Ask students to explain error

types, in random and

systematic.

• Ask students to explain the

need for calibration.

Recommended

textbooks, lecture notes,

chalk, chalk board,

Duster, etc.

2

1.6 Give examples of sensing elements controlling used in mechanical engineering (together with their principle of operation and area of application e.g. string gauge. 1.7 Give example of a simple electrical, hydraulic and mechanical amplifying elements etc. (together with their principle of operation and area of application 1.8 Give examples of signal converters (e.g. give example of signal converters bridge circuit, or changer amplifier etc (together with their principle of operation, use and area of application.

• Ask the students to describe

with sketches the components

parts of instrument system and

t heir proper function

• Ask student to explain signal

conditioning and transformers.

• Illustrate with good diagrams

and make notes.

• Illustrate with good diagrams

and make notes.

• Assess.

81


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)


General Objective 1.0: Understand the general characteristics of measuring instruments and

measurements. Week


3

1.9 Explain how static performance

parameter of measuring systems such as

sensitivity, accuracy, precision, hysteresis,

dead band etc can be determined.

1.10 Explain how parameters associated

with dynamic performance of measuring

systems can be determined e.g. step

response, and frequency responses.

1.11 Find the step responses to a first order

system.

1.12 Find the step response of a second

order system.

1.13 Find the frequency response of a

second order system.


accuracy and precision and

their effect in measurement.

• Ask students to demonstrate

their understanding of

response to step and impulse

signal input

• Ask students to sketch

response diagram to step and

impulse signal input.

• Assess.

82


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)


General Objective 2.0: Understand the measurement of various parameters e.g. displacement stress,

speed, time, temperature etc.


4

2.1 Classify displacement - measuring

devices into electrical and mechanical types

giving examples.

2.2 Explain the construction and principle of

operation of dial indicator

2.3 Explain with the aid of an illustration the

principle of operation of a ´float’ as a simple

displacement-measuring device.

2.4 Explain the principle of operation of the

linear variable displacement transducer

(L.V.D.T)

2.5 Explain the operation of potentiometer

as a displacement-measuring device.

2.6 Describe the measurement of force by

(i) gravity balance method. (ii) Fluid-

pressure method (iii) deflection of elastic

element method (iv) piezoelectric element.


to determine what parameters

to measure.


use of indicator in

measurement system


translation of effects from

sensors to visual read out

• Ask students to sketch the

circuit for force measurement

in 2.6.

• Ask student to make any of

the force measuring devices.


use of various physical

relationships as sensors for

manufacturing effects.


to measure time dependent

variables.


output from counter devices.

• Ask student to sketch the

essential features of a counter

83


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)





5

2.7 Describe various methods of measuring

torque

2.8 Describe method of measuring strain of

elastic elements.

2.9 Explain strain measurement using (i).

Mechanical gauge. (ii) optical strain gauge

and (iii) electrical strain gauge.

2.10 Explain stress measurements using (i)

photo elastic models (ii) photo elastic

coatings.

2.11 Describe the method of time

measurement using (i) measuring

oscillators (ii) industrial timing method using

stop-washer or stop-clocks.

2.12 Describe the operation of counting

devices such as (i)mechanical counters (ii)

Electronic counters.

2.13 Explain the principle of signal of

frequencies by measurement using the (i)

cathode ray oscilloscope (ii) Digital

methods.

2.14 Describe method of angular-velocity

measurements using (i) mechanical

tachometers (ii) The drag-cut tachometers

(iii) the electro magnetic pulse technique

(iv) the photo-electronic technique (v) the

stroboscope.

2.15 Describe temperature measurement

using non-electrical methods involving (i)

expansion of liquids (ii) expansion of vapors

and gases (iii) expansion of solids.

• Ask student to construct and

calibrate any of the devices in

2.15


use of physical properties of

sensors for measurement.

• Assess.

84


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)





6


using electrical methods involving (i) self-

generating transducers i.e. (ii) variable

control-parameter transducers i.e. variable

resistance transducers resistance

thermometers.

• Illustrate with good diagrams,

make notes and prepare

assignments for the students.

• Assess the notes.

7


using radiation method involving the use of

(i) optical pyrometers (ii) infrared

pyrometers.

2.18 Explain liquid-level measurement

using the following method (i) direct level

measuring devices, (ii) mercury manometer

(iii) buoyancy method (float method), (iv)

electrical methods (e.g. capacitance and

photoelectric method), (v) Optical methods.

8

2.19 Explain the operation of the following

flow measurement devices (i) orifice (ii)

venturi meter (iii) pitot tube (iv) static

pressure drop etc.

General Objective 3.0: Understand the principle of potentiometer and bridge circuits


9

3.1 Explain the basic laws (ohms and kirchoff’s laws) for simple network. 3.2 Illustrate how a potentiometer can be used as (i) voltage divider (ii) for voltage balancing. 3.3 Explain the principles of D.c. wheat-stone bridge 3.4 Explain the principles of A.c. Bridge for resistance, capacitance and inductance measurements.


kirchoff’s law and use it to

draw block diagrams of

Resistor, Capacitor -

Inductance (R C I) circuit.


principle of thed.c. Wheat

stone bridge anda.c. bridge.

85


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)


General Objective 4.0: Understand the concept of automatic control system


10

4.1 Explain the general significance of

control system

4.2 State examples of areas of application

4.3 Classify control system into types (open

loop and closed loop).

4.4 Describe continuous and sequential

systems (with examples) as sub-divisions of

open loop control system

4.5 Describe continuous and off-on systems

(with examples as sub-divisions of closed

loop control system.

4.6 Explain the terms associated with a

basic closed-loop control system.

4.7 State advantages and disadvantages of

a closed-loop system.

• Ask students to explain why

control systems are better than

manual control in particular

applications.

• Ask students to differentiate

between open and closed loop

control system.

• Ask students to give

examples of continuous and

sequential systems.

• Ask students to explain and

give examples of off-on and

continuous systems as closed

loop.


references input, controlled

variable, feed back elements

etc of a control system.

86


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)


General Objective 5.0: Know the various control systems


11-12

5.1 Classify control system into branches of

applications (i.e. speed control, position

control, process control, path control etc.)

5.2 Illustrate with simple diagram(s) an

example of the types of control systems

listed in 5.1.

5.3 Explain the general principle of

determination of system time response (i.e.

using step and ramp input signals.)

5.4 Find response for first order system

5.5 Find reponse for second order system.

5.6 Describe parameters of the response of

a second order system (e.g. overshoot, rise

time etc.).

• Ask students to classify

control system based on

application

• Ask students to explain with

diagrams some of the systems

in 5.1

• Ask students to find the

reverse transform of laplace

transform functions of a closed

system using step function and

ramp function as inputs.

• Ask students to determine

time response of first and

second order systems.

• Ask students to explain by

illustration the parameters of

the response of a second

order system.

87


(OPTION)


(1-0-2)


General Objective 6.0: Know ordinary linear system terms.


13-15

6.1 Explain dynamic equations and

transforms then into algebraic equations.

6.2 Explain transfer functions and block

diagrams

6.3 Explain oscillations, stability and

transient response

6.4 Explain mathematical stability criteria for

continuous time and discrete-time systems.

6.5 Explain Myquits diagrams and the Bode

plot.

6.6 Determine phase margin and gain

margin in 6.3.

• Ask students to transform

dynamic equations into

algebraic equations.

• Ask students to write and

draw transfer functional block

diagrams of simple closed loop

control system.


method of stability and apply

them to a simple closed loop

control system.

• Ask students to plot the

Myquits diagram and the Bode

plot for simple systems.

• Ask students to determine

the Laplace transform of a

simple system and determine

the phase margin and gain

margin.

88


(OPTION)

Course: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Course Code: MEC 314 Contact Hours: 1-0-2


General Objective: Demonstrate skills in the measurement of Force and pressure Week


1-2

1.1 Measure force using the following

methods:- (i) granty (ii) Fluid-pressure (iii)

deflection (iv) Piezo electric train transducer.

1.2 Measure Pressure using Piezometer and

manometers.

• Demonstrate activities 1.1

and 1.2 for the students to

learn and ask them to perform

the activities.


• Practical guide

• Granty apparatus

• Fluid -pressure

apparatus

• Deflection apparatus

• Piezo electric train

transducer

• Piezometer

• Manometer

General Objective 2.0: Demonstrate skills in the measurements of strain, and time


3-5

2.1 Measure strain using the following:-

a) Mechanical gauges

b) Optical strain-gauges, and

c) Bridge amplifiers.

2.2 Measure time using the following:

a) electronic timers

b) stribiscopes

d) Function generators and

e) Stop watches



learn and allow them to

practise all the activities.


• Mechanical gauges

• Optical strain gauges

• Bridge amplifiers

• Electronic timers

• Stroboscopes

• Function generators

• Stop watches.

General Objective 3.0: Demonstrate skills in the measurement of frequency and angular velocity


3.1 Measure frequency signals using cathode

ray, and oscilloscopes.

3.2 Measure angular - velocity using hand-

held tachometers.

• Demonstrate activities in 3.1


learn and ask them to carry

out the activities.

• Cathod ray,

oscilloscopes

• Tachometers

89


(OPTION)

Course: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Course Code: MEC 314 Contact Hours: 1-0-2


General Objective 4.0: Demonstrate skills in measurement of temperature, liquid level and fluid


9 - 10

4.1 Measure temperature using the following

instruments:

a) radiation and optical

pyrometers

b) vapor pressure

thermometers

c) platinium resistance

thermometer

d) thermocouples constant

copper - constantan. Pt - pt

Rd. 4.2 Measure liquid level

with the following methods -

Direct, manometer, buoyancy,

electrical and optical.

4.3 Measure fluid flow with the following

lartices - orifice, venturimeter, pitot tube and

static pressure drop.

• Demonstrate activities in 4.1

for the students to learn and

ask them to carry out the

activities.


• Radiation and optical

pyrometers

• Vapour pressure

thermometer

• Platinium resistance

thermometer

• Thermocouples

constant copper -

constantan.

General Objective 5.0: Demonstrate skills in the measurement of voltage, resistance, capacitance

and inductance


11 - 13

5.1 Demonstrate how a potentiometer can be

used as a voltage divider and voltage

balancing.

5.2 Use d.c. wheet stone bridge to measure

resistance.

5.3 Use a.c. bridge to measure resistance,

capacitance and inductance.

• Demonstrate activities 5.1 to

5.3 for the students to learn

and allow them to practise the

activities till they become

competent.


• Potentiometer

• Wheatstone bridge

• a.c. bridges

General Objective 6.0: Demonstrate Skills in the design and construction of a simple control system


6.1 Design and Construct a variable control

system to operate a simple constant speed

water turbine from a tank.

• Demonstrate activity 6.1 for

the students to learn and ask

them to perform the activity.

• Manual

• Design materials,

etc.

90

Mechanics of Machines


Course: MECHANICS OF MACHINES Course Code: MEC 315 Contact Hours: 2-0-2


General Objective 1.0: Understand the basic concepts of links and plane mechanism Week


1 - 2

1.1 Define such basic terms with machine,

link, mechanism, kinematics pairs,

inversion

1.2 Describe the fundamentals of simple

plane mechanism e.g. sliderr crank,

Oldham coupling

1.3 Differentiate between the types of

kinematics constants

1.4 Solve problems involving the above

topics

• Introduce students to free

body diagrams for velocity

analysis.

• Ask students to name links

mechanisms etc that they know

• Calculate the velocity and

acceleration of up to 4 - link

mechanism

• Determine graphically the

velocity and acceleration of

simple mechanism

• Use instantaneous centers

velocity diagrams and

acceleration diagrams to find

the velocity and acceleration of

simple links

• Ask student to define velocity

and acceleration graphically in

an example


instantaneous centers.

Illustrate with diagrams and

make notes.

• Assess.

Recommended


chalk board, chalk,

duster, etc.

91




General Objective 2.0: Understand the application of friction, its effects, application and reduction


3-5

2.1 Define friction

2.2 Define and state the factors which

influence 2.1

2.3 Explain the difference between static,

kinetic, sliding, rolling and fluid friction.

2.4 Analyse the kinetics of a body on a

rough incline plane.

2.5 Calculate the friction on square and

vee thread.

2.6 State the advantages and

disadvantages of friction

2.7 Enumerate different types of clutches

2.8 Define the formula for the frictional

torque in flat clutches conical clutches,

and collars assuming uniform pressure

and rate of wear.

2.9 Explain fluid friction.

2.10 Differentiate the different types of

anti-friction bearing.

2.11 Describe the application of journal

bearings.

2.12 Sketch the pressure distribution in a

jornal bearing

2.13 List the common lubricants and their

properties

2.14 List the common solid lubricants and

their properties.

2.15 Explain the effect of temperature on

the viscousity of lubricants.

2.16 Explain the quantitative aspect of thin

and thick film of their applications.


different clutches from

diagrams


formula for the frictional torque

desired for the different clutch

types.


bearings work in a machine.

• Ask the students to name the

application of the types of

bearings


lubrications work.

• Ask students to explain why

different lubricants have

different application

• Recapitulate on the forces on

a body on an machine

Recommended


chalk board, chalk,

duster, etc.

92




General Objective 3.0: Know the concept of balancing of machines


6-7

3.1 Explain the importance of balancing of

machines

3.2 Differentiate between static and

dynamic balancing

3.3 Find the magnitude and position of

balancing mass for rotating bodies on the

same plane or different planes.

3.4 Explain the principle, and use of

typical dynamic balancing machine.

• Recapitulate on concept of

planes and axes.

• Ask students to explain what

they understand on balancing

of machines.

• Ask students to explain static

and dynamic balancing.


briefing sheet before starting.

• Solve problems related to

above topic.


General Objective 4.0: Understand the functions and application of flywheels


8-9

4.1 Define the different terms relating to

flywheels, such as, mass, moment of

inertia, torque, turning moment diagrams,

co-efficient of fluctuation of speed and

energy, maximum, minimum, and mean

speeds.

4.2 Distinguish between sim and disc

types of flywheels.

4.4 Determine the size of the flywheel

from the turning

moment diagram and fluctuation of speed.

4.4 Find the importance of turning

moments in reciproca-ting engines

4.5 Explain D’Alemberts Principle

4.6 Calculate inertia forces of turning

movement in reciproca-ting engines

4.7 Solve problems related to topics in 4.7

and 4.8 above.

• Ask students to explain their

understanding of flywheel.


need for a flywheel on an

engine

• Solve problems related to

above topic


fluctuation of speed with load

on a working engine and how

the flywheel operates


D’Alemberts principle

• Ask students to explain inertia

forces.


fluctuation energy in a

reciprocating engine. Assess

93




General Objective 5.0: Understand the basic principles of free and forced vibration and vibration.


10-11

5.1 Discuss vibration, its effects and

applications.

5.2 Define the terms amplitude, cycle,

periods, frequency, phase angle, degrees

of freedom, damping ratio, log

development, and resonance.

5.3 Distinguish between longitudinal,

transverse and torsional vibrations

5.4 Derive equations of motion for an

undamped and damped spring-mass

system in free translation vibration-single

degree of freedom

5.5 Analyse the delay characteristics of

under-damped, over-damped, and

critically damped freely vibrating simple

S.D.C.F. system.

5.6 Discussed the basic concepts of

vibration transmissibility and isolation in a

S.D.C.F. system.

5.7 Solve problems related to above

topics.

5.8 Coefficient using universal vibration

apparatus.

5.9 Understand vibration in machines and

required damping.

• Ask students to explain their

understanding of vibration.


situation when vibration is used

and when it is not wanted

• Sketch model of equivalent

spring-mass system for free

and damped vibration

• Ask students to develop the

model and free body diagram

for spring mass system.


defined terms. Periods

• Ask students to recapitulate

motion of a plane and about an

axis


equations of motion for

• Undamped spring-mass

• Damped spring-mass

• Ask students to Critical

damping

• Ask the student to sketch

examples of machine Damping

• Assess.

94




General Objective 6.0: Understand the transmission of power by belts chain and gears


12-15

6.1 Differentiate between open and

crossed belt drives and calculate the

length of the belt used in each case

6.2 Explain the use of idler pulling

connecter, shaft pulley and stepped

pulleys

6.3 Derive an expression relating initial

tension to tension in the slack and tight

sides of a belt.

6.4 Derive the maximum tension ratio in a

flat belt and vee belts.

6.5 Derive expressions for power

transmitted belt drives.

6.6 State the condition of uniform motion

in toothed gearing system

6.7 Understand the classification of V-

belts by sizes and length

6.8 Define gear involment, addendum

dedendum, circular pitch, diametrical

Pitch, module, pressure angle.

6.9 State the advantages of gear drives

over belts, rope, and chain drives

6.10 Distinguish between simple and

compound gear train.

6.11 Define epicyclic gear train


disadvantages of epicyclic gear train.

6.13 Calculate the velocity ratio of

epicyclic gear trains

6.14 Sketch typical examples of coupling

6.15 Describe power transmission by

hydraulic means.

• Ask students to explain their understanding • of a transmission unit. • Ask the students to explain the various belt drive arrangements • Ask students to explain Center shaft • Pulleys and stepped pulleys • Ask the students to explain the expressions for tensions on • Slack side • Tight sides • Ask students to explain one expression for power transmitted in belt drives. • Ask students to explain how gears transmit motion. • Ask students to explain the various gear terms. • Ask students to explain simple and compound gears • Solve problems relating to above 6.7 • Ask Students to explain velocity ratios for simple and compound gear • Ask students to explain epicyclic gear trains. • Ask students to explain the advantages • And disadvantages of epicyclic gears trains. • Ask students to indicate known applications for simple, compound and epicyclic gears.• Ask students to explain the types and uses of coupling that are available • Ask students to explain the components of a hydraulic power transmission. • Ask students to recapitulate on the co-efficient of friction for belt drives • Assess.

95


(OPTION)

Course: Mechanics of Machines Course Code: MEC 315 Contact Hours:

2hrs/wk


General Objective Week


1 - 5

1.1 Conduct experiment to determine the co-

efficient of friction between thread and nut using

the screw jack apparatus.

1.2 Perform experiment on sliding block with

(i) No lubrication

(ii) Thin film lubrication

(iii) Rolling support



learn and ask them to

carryout the experiment.

• Stress jack

apparatus

• Sliding block

• Rolling support,

etc.

2.0 Demonstrate skills in balancing of machines

6 - 8

2.1 Carry out primary and secondary balancing

2.2 Conduct experiment on static balancing of four

mass system relating to flywheels such as mass,

moment of inertia torque, turning moment

diagrams, co-efficient of fluctuation of speech and

energy, maximum, mean speed.

• Practise the activities.


• Balancing

wheels.

3.0 Understand the operation of flywheels.

9 - 11

3.1 Conduct experiment to determine moment of

inertia of a flywheel by falling wheel method

3.2 Carryout experiment on fluctuation of speed

with load on a working engine and how the flywheel

operates




out the activities.

• Flywheel and its

accessories.

4.0 Comprehend Power transmission by belts, chain and gears

12 - 15

4.1 Conduct experiment to determine the

coefficient of friction for flat and vee-belts.

4.2 Conduct experiment to determine the velocity

ratio of epicycles gear trains



learn and allow them to

practise, till they become

perfect.


• Belt drives, Belt,

• Gear trains.

96

Strength of Materials II


COURSE: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS II Course Code MEC 322 Contact Hours 2Hrs/WK


General Objective: 1.0 Understand forces in members of statically determinate and simple

intermediate Structure Week


1

1.1 State the conditions for

equilibrium of con-current and co-

planer forces

1.2 State the assumptions made in

the analysis of pinjointed structures.

1.3 Define statically determine

structure.

1.4 Define an indeterminate

structure.

1.5 Define a stable indeterminate

structure.

1.6 Distinguish between the young

modular of elasticity (E) Shear

modular of rigidity (G) and bulk

modulus (K)

• Ask students to write the conditions

for equilibrium in mathematical form.

• Recommended

textbooks, chalk board,

chalk, Duster, etc.

97




General Objective: 2.0 Analysis and solve problems in statically determinate structures


2

2.1 Determine forces in statically

determinate frame members by:

a. Analytical

method

b. Graphical

method

c. Method of section

2.2 Solve problem related to above

using the 3 methods

a. Modulus of

elasticity

b. Yield strength

c. Maximum tensile

strength

• Guide students through worked

examples

• Give assignment (home work) on

related problems.

• Ask students to perform the tensile

test.

2.4 Compute shearing force and

bending moment loaded beams

2.5 Relate the intensity of loading

and the bending moment

2.6 Calculate the second moment of

area for simple cases.

2.7 Use the parallel and

perpendicular axis theorems to

compute the second moment of

area I

2.8 Establish the bending equation

Ask the student to compute shearing

force and bending.

Ask the student to relate the intensity

of loading, the shearing force and the

bending moment.

Ask the student to calculate the

second moment of area for simple

cases

Ask the student to use the parallel

and perpendicular axis theorems to

compute the second moment of area

I

Ask the student to establish the

bending equation

98




General Objective: 3.0 Know the bending theory and its application by


3

3.1 State various types of beams as

differentiated in their

a. Supports -

b. Simple

c. Rigid

a. Loading -

b. Point

concentrated load

c. Uniformly

distributed load

3.2 Apply equilibrium laws to the

determination of beam supports

3.3 Apply simple bending theory to

the analysis of beams in flexure..

3.4 Determine longitudinal stress on

a beam due to bending.

• Ask students to name various

beams in commonly used machinery

• Guide students through related

worked examples.

• Grade and return students

homework, assignment and

laboratory work.

• Teaching aids such as

model beam and load

hangers, various loads

etc.

General Objective 4.0: Objective: Know the use of shearing force and bending moment diagrams


4

4.1 Derive the expression for

shearing stress at any point in a

beam section in flexure.

4.2 Calculate the shearing stress

distribution in a symmetric

homogenous beam section in

flexure.

4.3 Solve problems related to above

and draw shearing force and

bending moment diagrams,

• Ask students to

• Define in flexure


examples

• Grade and return graded homework

assignments.

99




General Objective 5.0: Predict Structural Stability of a beam from deflection point of view


5

5.1 Know the double-integration

method of analyzing deflection in

beams

5.2 Solve problems using to the

double integration method to

analyse various types of beams

5.3 Sketch slope and deflection

curves

5.4 Derive Macaulay’s equation for

deflection caused by concentrated

and uniformly distributed loads

5.5 Determining the value and

position of maximum deflection

• Ask students to derive the deflection

equation for various standard beams

with simple loading


examples

• Grade and return graded home work

and laboratory reports

• Assess

General Objective 6.0: Know the 3-moment equation as applied to continuous beam.


6

6.1 Distinguish amongst continuous

beams.

6.2 Derive the 3-moment equation

6.3 Use the 3-moment equation to

determine reaction at simple

supports of continuous beams

6.4 Use the 3-moment equation to

determine reaction at supports of

continuous beams

• Ask students to sketch various

beams and name them.

• Ask students to derive the 3-

moment equation.

• Give related home

• Work assignment.

• Grade and return graded homework,

assignment and laboratory.

General Objective 7.0: Know Cast Gliano’s theorem and its application on to problems of deflection

of curved bars.


7

7.1 Calculate strain energy due to

bending.

7.2 Prove Castighanno’s theorem.

7.3 Apply Castiphano’s theorem.

7.4 Solve problems related to

above.

• Ask students to derive Castiphano’s

theorem.


examples

100




General Objective 8.0: Know Castipliano’s theorem and its application to problem of deflection of

curve bars


8

8.1 Calculate strain energy due to

twisting

8.2 Apply theorem to 8.1

8.3 Solve problems related to 8.3

above


examples

• Grade and return graded

assignments and lab reports

General Objective 9.0: Know factors which affect load carrying capacity to columns


9

9.1 Define columns

9.2 Explain the effect of shape,

length and restraints on load

carrying capacity of columns. Give

mathematical relationships

9.3 Calculate safe load on columns

loaded axially.

9.4 Differentiate between crushing

load and buckling load on columns.

9.5 Solve problems relating to

above topics.

9.6 Understand slenderness ratio of

columns/struts


examples on related problems.

• Give assignment\homework.


assignment and lab reports.

General Objective 10.0: Know factors, which affect eccentrically loaded columns.


10

10.1 Calculate site load on columns

loaded eccentrically.

10.2 Derive the cosine equation for

eccentrically loaded columns.


above.


between safe axial load and safe

eccentric load.


examples

• Give home work assignment for

students


assignment to students.

101




General Objective 11.0: Know the analysis of springs for different engineering applications.


11

11.1 Describe a close-coiled helical

spring.

11.2 Derive an expression for

maximum shear stress in a close-

coiled helical spring under axial load

11.3 Calculate the axial deflection of

a close-coiled helical spring.

• Ask students to draw and label the

critical dimensions of a helical spring


examples.



General Objective 12.0: Know the analysis of springs for different engineering applications


12

12.1 Derive the expression for the

angular spring under axial load

12.2 Discuss the following failure

modes in engineering materials.

a. Shock/impact

b. Fatigue

c. Creep

• Ask students to write term paper on

various modes of failure of

engineering materials

• Solve problems related to 11.1 to

12.2

General Objective 13.0: Know the analysis of laminated (leaf) springs


13

13.1 Derive an expression for the

stress in a laminated spring.

13.2 Determine the proof load in a

laminated spring.

13.3 Determine the maximum

deflection for 13.2

13.4 Calculate the strain energy

stored in a laminated spring.


laminated spring.


between leaf and coiled spring.

• Give assignments related to

laminated springs.



• Assess

102




General Objective 14.0: Know theorems applicable to material failure in complex stress situations.


14

14.1 Understand maximum strain

theory of St. Venant

14.2 Understand maximum

principal/stress theorem of Rankine

14.3 Understand maximum shear

stress theory of J.J. Guest

• Ask students to state

i. Maximum strain

theory of St. Venant

ii. Maximum Principal

stress theory of

Rankine

iii. Maximum shear

stress theory of

Guest

• Apply 14.1, 14.2 & 14.3 to solve

related problems

• Take students through a worked

example in each of the theorems.

• Class room

• White board

• Projection

General Objective 15.0: Know theorems applicable to modes of failure of materials


15

15.1 Understand Von Mises total

distortion energy theorem.

15.2 Apply Von Mises total

distortion energy theorem to predict

stability or otherwise in a combined

stress system.

15.3 Solve problems related to 15.2

• Ask students to state Von Mises

total distortion energy theorem.

• Take students through worked

examples on the application of the

theorem of 15.1

• Give assignments related to above.

• Classroom

• White board

• Projection

• Slides

103


(OPTION)

Course: Strength of Materials II Course Code: MEC 322 Contact Hours: 2-0-2




1 - 5

1.1 Identify frame structures in models

and in life-cranes, trusses, etc in

laboratory.

1.2 Perform laboratory experiment on the

beam rake to confirm that summation of

vertical forces in body in equilibrium must

be equal to zero.

1.3 Determine experimentally various

strength and properties of materials.


to 1.3 for the students to


out the activities.


• Models of trusses

• Beam rake apparatus.

• Tensile test equipment with

digital read-out of load and

deformation measurement.

2.0 Demonstrate skills on determination of torsion and stress


6 - 9

2.1 Perform experiment on Torsion of

shaft and determine modulus of rigidity.

2.2 Determine longitudinal test on a

beam due to bending.

2.3 Perform fatique test on some

materials specimen

(a) Copper,

(b) Aluminium

(c) Steel




out the activities.

• Assess students.

• Torsion testing

• Fatique testing material for

varying loads on specimen.

104


(OPTION)



3.0 Predict Structural stability of a beam from deflection point of view


10 - 12

3.1 Perform the following laboratory

experiment using the beam apparatus

(i) Verify the principle of

superposition

(ii) Verify the relationship

between deflection and

load span, second

moment of area and

modules of elasticity.

3.2 Perform experiment on the

continuous beam apparatus to determine

reactions at supports.

3.3 Perform Hardness test on specified

materials.

3.4 Perform laboratory experiment on

creep of lead specimens.

3.5 Perform laboratory experiment to

determine the fracture load using the

Impact Testing Machine.




out the activities.


• Beam apparatus

• Continours Beam apparatus

comprising beams of various

material, supports,

lead/extension meters

• Hardness testers preferably

with digital read-out.

• Lapping machine for

preparation of specimen

surface

• Table monitor lathe

• Creep apparatus

• Consumable test

specimens.

4.0 Demonstrate factors that affect eccentrically loaded columns


13

4.1 Perform experiment using the stout

testing rig to determine creeping loads for

metallic structures when

(a) Both ends are fixed

(b) Both ends are free

(c) One end free and one

end fixed

• Demonstrate activity 4.1

for the students to learn

and practice


• Strut test rig.

105


(OPTION)



5.0 Demonstrate skills in the analysis of springs for engineering applications


14 - 15

5.1 Perform laboratory experiment to

determine various spring properties.

5.2 Perform laboratory experiment using

the spring apparatus to determine the

modulus of spring/

5.3 Perform laboratory experiment using

the leaf spring testing machine to study

the behaviour of semi-elliptic leaf spring

subjected to load.



learn and ask than to

perform all the activities.

• Torsion and compression

springs of various sizes.

• Various heights.

• Dead height tester.

• Creep demonstration rig

• Lead spring apparatus.

• Model lead springs for

demonstration.

106

Fluid Mechanics

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING -MANUFACTURING

(OPTION)

COURSE: FLUID MECHANICS Course code: MEC 323 Contact Hours:

4hrs/Wk


Week General Objective: 1.0 Understand the working principles and the use of different types of fluid flow

measuring devices

1

1.1 Explain the need for fluid flow

measurement (Review)

1.2 Explain stagnation point,

stagnation pressure and dynamic

pressure in a fluid

1.3 Define the coefficients of

velocity contraction and discharge

• Ask students to list some flow measurements

device and explain their uses

• Ask students to explain lift and drag forces on

an Acvofol section and their effects

• Develop an expression related to the

coefficients of the orifice

• Ask students to develop an expression related

to the coefficients of the orifice and solve

problems related to it. Assess.

General Objective: 2.0: Understand the working principles and use of different types of fluid flow

measuring devices


2

2.1 Describe a flow nozzle

venturimeter with the aid of a

sketch.

2.2 Derive expressions for the

actual and ideal discharges through

a venturimeter, nozzle.

2.3 Obtain the expression for the


an orifice meter, venturi and

nozzles.

• Ask students sketch energy distribution

diagrams for flow through nozzles and

venturimeter

107


(OPTION)


4hrs/Wk

General Objective 3.0: Understand the working principles and use of different types of fluid flow

measuring devices


3

3.1 Describe a flow nozzle.

3.2 Obtain an expression for the


a flow nozzle.

3.3 Define a notch.

3.4 Describe rectangular and V-

notches.

3.5 Describe a weir and determine

its coefficient of discharge

• Ask students to obtain an expression for the

actual and ideal discharges through a flow

nozzle.

• Ask students to define a notch

• Ask students to describe rectangular and V-

notches.

• Ask students to describe a weir and determine

its coefficient of discharge.

General Objective 4.0: Understand working principles and use of different types of fluid flow

measuring devices


4

4.1 Explain the use of notches and

determine their

coefficient of discharge.

4.2 Describe a suppressed weir

• Ask students to explain the use of notches and

• Develop expressions for actual and ideal

discharge through notches and weirs with first

and second approximations.

General Objective 5.0: Know the different types of flow in pipes and the parameters governing them


5


head lost due to friction.

5.2 Explain the graph of Vs/Re for

pipe flows

5.3 Solve problems related to 2.1-

2.6 above

• Ask students to derive an expression for the

head lost due to friction.

• Ask students to explain the graph of Vs/Re for

pipe flows.

• Ask students to solve problems related to 2.1 -

2.6 above.

General Objective 6.0: Understand Channel Flow


6

6.1 Define an open channel flow 6.2 Identify the instances where open channel flow exists. 6.3 Explain the terms, ‘wetted perimeter’ (p) and ‘hydraulic mean depth (m)

• Ask students to define an open channel flow

• Ask students to identify instances where open

channel flow exists.

• Ask students to explain the terms ‘wetted

perimeter (p) and ‘hydraulic mean depth’ (m)

108


(OPTION)


4hrs/Wk

General Objective 7.0: Understand the principles in Channel Flow


7

7.1 Develop Chazi formula for a

rectangular open channel

7.2 State the formula for flow in

channels

7.3 Determine the head lost due to

friction in an open channel flow

• Ask students to develop chazi formula for a

rectangular open channel

• Ask students to state the formula for flow in

channels

• Ask students to determine the head lost due to

friction in an open channel flow.

General Objective 8.0: Understand the different types of flow in open channel and the parameters

governing them.


8

8.1 Derive the expression for the

friction factor

8.2 Solve simple problems related

to 3.7 above.

8.3 Determine the Reynolds

number in a pipe flow

8.4 Calculate the friction loss along

pipes.

• Ask students to derive the expression for the

friction factor

• Ask students to solve simple problems related

to 3.7 above.

• Ask students to determine the Reynolds

number in a pipe flow

• Ask students to calculate the friction loss along

pipes.

General Objective 9.0: Know the working principles of positive displacement and roto-dynamic

machines and their relative uses.


9

9.1 Classify hydraulic machines as

positive displacement and rotor-

dynamic machines.

9.2 Give at least 3 examples for

each type of machines in 4.1 above

9.3 Describe the main parts of

positive displacement and

rotordynamic machines

9.4 Explain the working principles

of positive displacement and rotor-

dynamic machines

• Ask students to classify hydraulic machines as

positive displacement and rotor-dynamic

machines

• Ask students to give at least 3 examples for

each type of machines in 4.1 above.

• Ask students to describe the main parts of

positive displacement and rotordynamic

machines

• Ask students to explain the working principles

of positive displacement and rotor dynamic

machines.

109


(OPTION)


4hrs/Wk

General Objectives: Understand the principles in reciprocating Pumps


10

10.1 Identify the merits and

demerits of each type of machines.

10.2 Draw the essential parts of a

reciprocating pump and explain its

working principles.

10.3 Draw the PV diagram for a

reciprocating pump for a complete

working cycle.


discharge from reciprocating pump.

• Ask students to identify the merits and

demerits of each type of machines

• Ask students to draw the essential parts of a

reciprocating pump and explain its working

principles.

• Ask students to draw PV diagram for a

reciprocating pump for a complete working

cycle.

• Ask students to derive an expression for the

discharge form of a reciprocating pump

General Objective 11.0: Know the working principles of positive displacement and rotordynamic



11

11.1 Distinguish between single

acting double acting simple cylinder

and multi-cylinder pumps

11.2 Define the terms coefficient of

discharge and percentage slip.

11.3 Draw the essential parts of a

centrifugal pump and explain its

working principles

• Ask students to distinguish between single

acting double acting single cylinder and multi-

cylinder pumps

• Ask students to define coefficient of discharge

and percentage of slip

• Ask students to draw the essential parts of a

centrifugal pump and explain its working

principle.

110


(OPTION)


4hrs/Wk

General Objective 12.0: Know the working principles of Pumps


12

12.1 Discuss the various types of

centrifugal pumps.

12.2 Draw the velocity triangles for

the inlet and outlet sides of the

impeller

12.3 Explain the terms absolute

velocity and relative velocity.

12.4 Develop an expression for the

work pump power

12.5 Explain the working principles

of impulse and reaction turbines

12.6 Describe the pelton wheel and

explain its working principles

12.7 Draw the velocity triangles

and derive and expression for the

power of pelton wheel

• Ask students to discuss the various types of

centrifugal pumps

• Ask students to draw the velocity triangles for

the inlet and outlet sides of the impeller

• Ask the students to explain the terms absolute

velocity and relative velocity.

• Ask students to develop an expression for

pump power.

• Ask the students to explain the working

principles of impulse and reaction turbines

• Ask students to describe the Pelton wheel and

explain its working principle

• Ask students to draw velocity triangles and

derive for the power of pelton wheel

General Objective 13.0: Know the working principles of positive displacement and rotordynamic



13

13.1 Draw the velocity triangles and derive an expression for the power developed by a reaction wheel 13.2 Define unit speed, unit discharge unit power and specific speed for hydraulic machines. 13.3 Solve problems related to 14.3 above. 13.4 Explain the following phenomena in fluid flow 13.5 Press surge, water hammer, cavitation 13.6 Explain the effects of problems of and their prevention

• Ask student to draw the velocity triangles and

also derive an expression for the power

developed by a reaction wheel.

• Ask students to define unit speed, unit

discharge unit power and specific speed for

hydraulic machines Develop expressions related

to the terms in 4.2 above

• Ask students to develop expression related to

the terms in 4,21 above

• Ask students to solve problems related to 4.21

above.

• Ask students to describe a surge tank

111


(OPTION)


4hrs/Wk

General Objective 14.0: Know the working principles of positive displacement and rotor dynamic



14

14.1 Conduct load tests on

reciprocating pump and analyse

the results.


centrifugal pump and analyse the

results.

14.4 Conduct load test on pelton

wheel

14.5 Conduct load test on a Francis

wheel

• Ask students to conduct load tests on

reciprocating pump and analyse the results.

• Ask student conduct load test on pelton wheel.

• Ask students to conduct load test on a Francis

wheel.


(OPTION)

Course: FLUID MECHANICS Course Code: MEC 323 Contact Hours: 2-0-2


General Objective 1.0 Understand the working Principles and use of different types of fluid flow Week


1 - 3

1.1 Determine the coefficient of

orifice and venturimeter

experimentally and solve problems

related to them.

1.2 Carry out experiments to

measure fluid flow using rectangular

and v-notches.

• Ask the student to obtain actual and

ideal discharges through an orifice

meter, vanturi and nozzles

experimentally.

• Solve problems of practical use in the

fluid flow measuring devices by using

first and second approximation.

• Orifice meter

• Venturi meter

• Flow nozzles

• V-Nortches

(rectangular & V-

notche)

2.0 Know the working Principles of Pumps

4-6


reciprocating Pump and analyse the

results.

2.2 Conduct load tests on centrifugal

Pump and analyse the results.

• Ask the students to compare the

result. In terms of unit speed, unit

discharge, unit Power and Specific

Speed.

• Reciprocuring

Pumps

• Centrifugal Pumps.

112


(OPTION)

Course: FLUID MECHANICS Course Code: MEC 323 Contact Hours: 2-0-2


General Objective 1.0 Understand the working Principles and use of different types of fluid flow Week


3.0 Know the working Principles of Rotar dynamic machines and their relative use

7-14

3.1 Carryout load test on Pelton and

Francis Wheels and analyse the

results.

• Ask the students to draw the velocity

triangles and also drive an expression

for the Power developed by the Wheels.

• Model of reaction

wheel.

113

Metal Forming and Heat Treatment


(OPTION)

COURSE: METAL FORMING AND HEAT

TREATMENT Course code: mem321

CONTACT HOURS:

6HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Definition and classification of heat treatment


1

1.1 Define heat treatment

1.2 Understand the TT and its application

to heat Treatment.

1.3 Classify Heat treatment into (i) those

involving bulk solid-state changes in

materials (ii) those involving surface

changes in material.

1.4 Explain the engineering situations

where each of 1.3 above is used.

• Ask the students to prepare TT

courses for given compositions

• Ask the students to list conditions

or situation where heat treatment is

required

• Ask students to classify annealing,

carbonizing martenpering etc into

heat treatment types in 1.3.

• TT wall charts for

some metals.

General Objective 2.0: Heat treatment processes involving bulk solid-state changes.


1 - 2

2.1 Use phase diagram to understand solid - state changes in material 2.2 Use the TT diagram for steel to describe (i) annealing and its applications (ii) full annealing and its applications (iii) sub- critical annealing (iv) isothermal annealing (v) stress-relief annealing (vi) homogenizing annealing (vii) austempering and martempering) 2.3 Explain the effect of the various heat treatments in 2.3 on the structure and properties of steels 2.4 Explain the term hardenability 2.5 Describe quenching and tempering treatments. 2.6 Describe the Joining- End- Quench Test 2.7 Explain the term limiting ruling section 2.8 Describe different types of quenching media 2.9 Use TT curved to select suitable quenching media

• Ask students to describe solid-

state changes irons-carbon

diagram.

• Ask students to use TT diagram to

describe annealing full annealing

sub-critical annealing and

isothermal annealing

• Ask students to carry out specific

heat treatments e.g. relief anneal or

case hardening on some carbon

steels


concept of hardernability


concept of hardenability

• Ask students to explain quenching

and tempering treatments

• Ask students to select quenching

media with the aid of TT curves.

• Iron-carbon

diagram

• TT diagrams

• Heat treatment

• Furnace

• low or medium

carbon steel, pieces

bars or rods.

• Joining End-

Quenching test

apparatus.

Water

Oil

Ash.

114


(OPTION)



CONTACT HOURS:

6HRS/WK


General Objective 3.0: Heat treatment involving surface changes


3

3.1 Classify and describe localized thermal

treatments (i) flame hardening (ii) induction

hardening (iii) laser hardening (iv) electron

beam hardening.

3.2 Describe the following thermo

chemical treatments(i) carburizing (ii)

carbonitriading (iii) austenitic

nitrocarburising (iv) nitriding (v) ferritic

nitrocarburising.

3.3 Explain how the treatments in 3.2 can

be carried out in the following media: solid,

liquid, gas, vacuum and plasma arc glow

discharge pointing out their advantages

and disadvantages.

• Ask students to describe flame

hardening induction hardening

laster hardening and electron beam

hardening.

• Ask students to describe

carburising, carbonitriading nitriding

and nitrocarburization.

• Ask students to explain the roles

of solid liquid plasma arc on heat

treatments.

General Objective 4.0: Selection of heat treatment furnaces


4

4.1 List and describe fuels for healing

furnaces


disadvantages of various fuels listed in 4.1

4.3 Describe types of heat treatment

furnaces (i) batch and continuous, direct

and indirect (iii) forced air

4.4 circulation (iv) liquid bath (v) fluidised

beds (vi) vacuum


disadvantages of each furnace listed in 4.3

• Ask students list type of fuels used

in heating furnaces

• Ask students to list out the

advantages and disadvantages of

fuel listed 4.1


differences between various heat

treatment furnaces

• Ask students to describe the

heating methods in a number of

heat treatment furnaces.

• Electric muffle

furnace.

115


(OPTION)



CONTACT HOURS:

6HRS/WK


General Objective 5.0: Heat treatment of non-ferrous metals


5

5.1 Explain the structural and property

changes of aluminum alloys to heat

treatment.

5.2 List the engineering applications of

heat-treated aluminum alloys.

5.3 Explain the structural and property

changes of copper alloys due to heat

treatment

5.4 List the engineering properties of heat-

treated copper alloys.

• Ask students to list structural and

property changes that heat

treatment confers on aluminum

alloys

• Ask students to list structural and

property changes that heat

treatment confer on copper alloys.

• Ask students to list engineering

properties of heat-treated copper

alloys.

• Aluminum silicon

alloy bars

• Aluminum copper

alloys bar

• High purity

aluminum bars

• Copper tin alloys

• Copper zinc

alloys.

General Objective: 6.0 Deformation of Metals


6

6.1 Distinguish between not and cold

working processes.

6.2 Explain hot and cold working

processes

6.3 Describe the mechanism of plastic

deformation using the slip theory.

6.4 Explain the effect of 6.2 on the

structure and mechanical properties of

materials.

• Ask students to explain what is

meant by hot working processes

• Ask students to explain when how

working is done and when cold

working is done.

• Ask students to explain in

mechanism of plastic deformation.


mechanism of plastic deformation

• Ask students to identify the plastic

deformation zone in the stress-

strain-of a ductile metal.

• Ask students to compare structure

and mechanical properties of cold

worked and hot worked materials.

• Rolling mill

• Forging machine,

heating furnace,

ferrous and non

116


(OPTION)



CONTACT HOURS:

6HRS/WK


General Objective 7.0: Hot working processes


7

7.1 List various hot working processes

7.2 Describe the following hot working

processes (a) rolling of plate or sheet (b)

forging and drop forging (c) extrusion of

solid and hollow sections

7.3 Explain the applications of processes

in 7.2

• Ask students to distinguish

between rolling forging and

extrusion

• Ask students to list the products to

list the products of rolling, forging

and extrusion

• Ask students to compare the

mechanical properties conferred on

worked sample. By forging, rolling

and extrusion

• ferrous bar

General Objective 8.0: Cold working processes


8

8.1 Describe the various cold working

processes (a) drawing of wire and tubes

(b) rolling of plate, sheet or strip (c)

spinning and flow turning (d) heading (e)

coining and embossing

8.2 Explain the stages in drawing a typical

component (Cup)

8.3 State the products for which each of

the processes in 8.1 are suitable.

8.4 Describe the annealing of cold worked

materials

8.5 State the structural changes which

occur during annealing of a cold worked

material

8.6 Explain the phenomenon of grain

growth during re-crystalli- zalion

8.7 Compare advantages and

disadvantages of hot working and cold

working

• Ask students to explain what is meant by cold working • Ask students to describe wire and tube drawing, plate sheet and strip rolling spinning and coining. • Ask students to state the mechanics of deformation in rolling wire and tube drawing and coining • Ask students to describe the set-up for deep drawing • Ask students to explain the deformation processes in deep drawing. • Ask students to describe the structural changes that occur when cold worked material is annealed • Ask students to explain recovery crystallization and grain growth • Ask students to list the merits and demerits of hot and cold working.

• Draw bench,

rolling mill

• Heat treatment

furnace

117


(OPTION)



CONTACT HOURS:

6HRS/WK


General Objective 9.0: Reasons for the control of variables in heat treatment


9 - 11

9.1 Explain the process variable in heat

treatment (a) heating rate (b) mode of heat

transfer (c) soaking temperature and time

(d) cooling rate (e) furnace atmosphere

9.2 Classify controlled atmosphere

applications into protective and chemically

active.

9.3 Describe the physic chemical

principles of controlled atmospheres with

respect to (a) oxidation control (b)

carburisation or decarburisation control (c)

nitrogen potential control

9.4 Describe atmosphere generation from

(a) exothermic source (b) stripped

exothermic source (c) endothermic from

propane and from natural gas.

• Ask students to explain the terms

heating rate, mode of heat transfer,

soaking temperature soaking time,

cooling rate and furnace

temperature as used in heat

treatment


differences between a controlled

atmosphere that is protective and a

controlled atmosphere that is

chemically active.


processes of oxidation

carbonization and nitrogen-potential

control.

• Ask students to discuss the

various methods of atmosphere

generation from propane and

natural gas.

General Objective 10.0: Origin and control of heat treatment defects.


12

10.1 Explain the origin of the following

defects (a) distortion and warpage (b)

cracking (c) surface scale and/or

contamination (d) grain growth, (e)

Blistering (f) insufficient hardness or soft

spots.

10.2 State the defects in 10.1.

10.3 Explain the control of the defects in

10.1

• Ask students to list defects that

many occur during and after heat

treatment.

• Ask students to identify the defects

and explain their origin.

118


(OPTION)



CONTACT HOURS:

6HRS/WK


General Objective 11.0: Powder metallurgy


13 - 15

11.1 Describe the different methods of

metal powder preparation

11.2 Describe the different methods of

achieving powder specifications e.g.

chemistry particle size and shape.

11.3 Describe the process of powder

compaction

11.4 Explain the effect of binders on the

ease of handing of green compacts.

11.5 Describe isostatic pressing.

11.6 Explain the effect of binders on the

ease of handling of green compact.

11.7 Describe the sintering process.

11.8 Explain the phenomenon of surface

energy reductions during sintering.

11.9 Describe the processes that lead to

the reduction of surface energy

11.10 List the advantages of powder

metallurgy

11.11 List the limitations of powder

metallurgy

• Ask students to list the various

methods of metal powder

production


sintering process.


reduction of surface energy will

occur during the sintering process.

• Ask students to list reasons why

components are made by powder

metallurgy

• Various metal

powder samples

e.g. reduced iron.

Atomized

magnesium etc.

119


(OPTION)

Course: METAL FORMING & HEAT

TREATMENT Course Code: MEM 321 Contact Hours: 2-0-4




1 - 5

1.1 Select appropriate heat

treatments for a range of steels in

application.

1.2 Carry out Specific heat treatments

e.g. relief anneal or case hardening,

quenching and tempering on some

carbon steel.



ask them to perform the

activities.

• Steel Materials

2.0 Demonstrate skills in furnaces selection and heat treatment of non-ferrous metals

6 - 10

2.1 Identify different furnaces used on

heat treatment and demonstrate its

use.

2.2 Carryout treatment processes in

selected non-ferrous metal materials.



allow them to practice

• Electric muffle furnace

3.0 Demonstrate skills in hot and cold working processes, and identify heat treatment defects

11

3.1 Identify and demonstrate the

procedure in hot and cold working

processes.

3.2 Identify the defects of heat

treatment and its origin.



ask to carryout the activities.


4.0 Demonstrate Skills in Powder Metallurgy processes

12-15

4.1 Identify and demonstrate the

methods of metal powder preparation.

4.2 Demonstrate the process of

powder compaction.

4.3 Demonstrate the sintering

process.



ask them to perform all the

activities.

• Various metal powder

samples. E.g. reduced iron,

Atomized magnesium, etc.

120

Joining and Fabrication Process


(OPTION)

Course: JOINING AND FABRICATION

PROCESS MEC 322

CONTACT HOURS:

2HRS/WK

COURSE SPECIFICATION: Theoretical Content

General Objective 1.0: METAL JOINING PROCESSES

WEEK SPECIFIC LEARNING OUTCOME TEACHERS ACTIVITIES RESOURCES

1

1.1 Define weldability of metals.

1.2 Describe soldering, brazing and

welding

1.3 State the applications of the

processes in 1.2.

1.4 State the factors that affect the

strengths of joints produced by the

processes in 1.2.

1.5 Describe adhesive bonding

1.6 List bonding materials

1.7 State the application of adhesive

bonding materials in 1.6

1.8 List different rivet types

1.9 Describe riveting

1.10 Determine the number of rivets

required for a given joint

• Ask the students to state the metals

and thickness that can be brazed,

soldered or welded.

• Ask the students to identify objects

with adhesive bonding in the

classroom

• That the students identify situating

when riveting is preferred to welding

• Select for different rivet sizes, the

size of matching drill bit.

• Recommended text

books

• Lecture notes

• Chalkboard

• Chalk.

• Drilling machine,

drill bits, rivet guns,

rivets.

121


(OPTION)


PROCESS MEC 322

CONTACT HOURS:

2HRS/WK


General Objective 2.0: Electric Arc Welding


2

2.1 Describe correctly the

characteristics of AC welding

transformer, rectifiers and the D.C

welding generators

2.2 Explain the functions of a

rectifiers straight and reverse polarity

2.3 Differentiate between A.C and

D.C. welding machines.

2.4 Compare the advantages and

disadvantages of machine types in 2-

3

2.5 Correctly state the materials used

for electrode coating and their

functions.

2.6 Solve problems associated with

welding in various positions and how

to counter them.

2.7 Correctly list the various weld

joints and how to prepare them.

2.8 Describe the procedure for multi-

run welds.

• Ask the students to prepare safety

precautions for connecting welding

machines

• Ask the students to document the

procedures for operating a welding

machine

• The following issues most be

highlighted

• Storage conditions for electrodes.

• Welding machine,

electrodes

122


(OPTION)


PROCESS MEC 322

CONTACT HOURS:

2HRS/WK


General Objective 3.0: Equipment for Gas welding and cutting


3

3.1 Describe the operations of (a)

welding regulator (b) welding

blowpipe (c) cutting blowpipe.

3.2 Describe the procedure for

lighting the welding torch and closing.

3.3 State the applications of different

types of flames

3.4 State different cutting nozzles

3.5 State welding nozzles (sizes) for

various material thicknesses.

• Ensure that the students: Learn how to maintain nozzles they should prepare exploded views of the nozzle. • Are conversant with the oxygen and acetylene valves. • Master the configuration of the acetylene generator. • Expose the students to the practices and problems of cutting various thickness of metal. • They should note that think-sheets tend to distort when flame-cut. • Ascertain the maximum thickness that can be gas welded.

• Oxy-acetylene sets -

5

• Flash gas lighter

• Steel rule

• Try-squart.

• MIG and MAG

welding set

• TIG welding set.

General Objective 4.0: Special welding Processes


4

4.1 State the types of gases used for shielded gas arc welding their areas of application and their effect on welds. 4.2 Describe the principles of operation of a submerged arc welding4.3 State the equipment and filler materials used in 4.4.

• Ask the students to state situations

and materials that requires sub

merged arc welding

General Objective 5.0: Welding, non - ferrous metals, cast iron and stainless Steel


5

5.1 Explain the problems involves in welding copper and its alloys 5.2 Describe the problems involved in welding aluminum and its alloys 5.3 State the procedure for fusion welding of cast iron and stainless steel. 5.4 Describe other methods of welding cast iron other than fusion welding

• Students should establish the proper procedures of wedding various non-terms metals. They should observe common practices in local workshops and compare with established technology • Students should establish the best methods of cutting stainless steel sheets.

123


(OPTION)


PROCESS MEC 322

CONTACT HOURS:

2HRS/WK


General Objective 6.0: Weld Defects


6

6.1 Know the various types of weld

defects and their causes.

6.2 Describe the following types of

weld defects (i) distortion (ii) lack of

penetration (iii) slag inclusion (iv)

undercutting cracks (v) lack of fusion

blow holes

6.3 Explain the nature and causes of

distortion

6.4 Explain and list methods of

eliminating distortion and cracking by

means of the skip and step back

methods, pre and post heating

peening welding from free to fixed

zone etc

6.5 Describe correct weld profiles and

dimensions

6.6 Explain the reasons for dressing

welds.

6.7 Explain the concept of stress

relief in weld merits.

General Objective 7.0: Weld symbols and specifications


7

7.1 Identify various weld symbols and

interpret them.

7.2 Specify welds in drawings

7.3 Design and determine suitable

weld joints.

• Students should be given standard

drawing of varies weldments to

interpret them in terms of welding

requirements.

• Make students prepare welding

procedures for different designs.

124


(OPTION)


PROCESS MEC 322

CONTACT HOURS:

2HRS/WK


General Objective 8.0: Machines used in fabrication


8.1 Explain shearing 8.2 Explain the working principles and uses of the following cutting machines (a) guillotine (b) nibbling machine (c) cropping machine (d) shearing machine (e) sawing machine 8.3 State the advantages and limitations of the machines in 8.2

• Ask the students to state the correct

machine to use for a given purpose.

• Profile cutting

machine

• Bending other

• Spinning machine

• Foot operated.

9.1 Explain bending action

9.2 Explain the working principle of

form machines (a) fly - press (b)

hydraulic press (c) press brake (d)

folding machines (e) rolling machine

(f) bending rolls

9.3 Describe the various operations

carries out on the above machine (a)

bending (b) edge curving (c)

straightening (d) bottoming folding (f)

rolling of sheet and plate materials

9.4 State the advantage and

limitations of the machines in 9.2.

• Ask the students to study the load

transfer mechanisms of the various

machines.

• Assign the students to state the

correct machines to use for a specific

application

• Ask the student to explain a flow

process and productions specifications

for carrying out any of the operator.

General Objective 10.0: Stiffening of metal sheets and plates


10.1 Explain stiffening in fabrication.

10.2 State reasons for stiffening

10.3 Describe the following methods

of stiffen sheet metal (a) wired edge

(b) folded edge (c) swaging

10.4 Describe the following methods

of stiffening plates and structural

members (a) web stiffening (b)

troughring (c) channeling (d) ribbing

• Let the students identify various

components around them that have

been stifferred

• Students should prepare a step-by-

step procedure of stiffening by wire

edge, folded edge and swaging.

125


(OPTION)


PROCESS MEC 322

CONTACT HOURS:

2HRS/WK


General Objective 11.0: Marking out


11.1 Explain the importance of

marking out profiles in fabrication.

11.2 Describe the concept of material

economy in marking out profiles from

sheet metal or plates.

11.3 Correctly set out the procedure

for mark - out profiles of (i) cone (ii)

frustum of a curve (iii) rectangular

vessel (iv) rectangular vessel with

folded edge.

• The students should carry out

exercises on cardboard on variousl

problem connected with marking out.

• Basic marking out

tools.

General Objective 12.0: Intersections


12.1 Explain the concept of

intersections of hollow vessels or

solids.

12.2 Mark out the intersection profiles

of (i) two cylinders at right angles (ii)

one cylinder at angle of 60o to the

other.

• Students should use card board to

mark out intersection profits.


(OPTION)

Course: JOINING AND FABRICATION PROCESS Course Code: MEC 322 Contact Hours: 2-0-4




1.1 Identify situation where riveting is preferred to welding 1.2 Select for different rivet sizes, the size of matching drill bit. 1.3 Carryout riveting operation.

126


(OPTION)

Course: JOINING AND FABRICATION PROCESS Course Code: MEC 322 Contact Hours: 2-0-4




2.0 Demonstrate skills in welding operations

1-7

2.1 Identify joints to be welded 2.2 Carry out joint preparation 2.3 Select welding nozzles sizes for various material thickness 2.4 Identify and demonstrate the procedures for welding various ferrous and non-ferrous metals. 2.5 Identify weld defects and ways of remedying them.

• Demonstrate activities 2.1 to 2.5

for the students to learn and ask

them to carryout the activities.


• Oxy-acetylene

sets (5)

• Flash gas lighter

• Steel rule try-

square.

• MIG and MAG

welding set

• TIG welding set.

3.0 Demonstrate skills in fabrication using metal sheets and plates

8 - 15

3.1 Identify and demonstrate the operations of the machines used in shearing and bending operations such as)

- guillotine, nibbling machine, cropping, shearing and sawing machines. - Fly- press, hydraulic press, press brake, folding, rolling and bending machines.

3.2 Demonstrate a step by step procedure of stiffening by wise edge, folded edge and swaging. 3.3 Demonstrate the procedure for mark out profiles of

(i) Cone (ii) Frustum (iii) Rectangular vessel (iv) Rectangular vessel with folded edge.

3.4 Demonstrate the mark out of intersection profiles of

(i) two cylinders at right angles (ii) one cylinder at angle of 60’ to the other.



them to perform all the activities.


• Profile cutting

machine

• Bending other

• Spinning

machine

• Foot operated

guilostine roller.

• Basic marking

out tools.

127

Foundry Technology and Practice


(OPTION)

COURSE: FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY &

PRACTICE CODE: MEM 323

CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective 1.0: Know the range of materials for pattern making their relative cost and

properties Week


1

1.1 List materials for pattern making

1.2 List the properties required of pattern

materials

1.3 State pattern materials an the basis of

overall economic advantage and optimum

performance

• Ask students to identify common pattern materials • Ask students to list properties required of pattern materials • Ask students to company various pattern materials in terms of properties economic advantage and performance

• Recommended text

books, lecture notes

• Chalk

• Chalkboard

General Objective 2.0: Know common methods of pattern making

Week Specific Learning Outcome Teachers Activities Resources

2

2.1 Describes the preparation of pattern from solid materials 2.2 Describe by means of diagrams the following pattern construction: thin frames segmental and lagged patterns 2.3 Describe the various methods of determine the position of lighting and supporting joints 2.4 Describe the methods of joining pattern materials by adhesives, soldering, brazing metal fastening and welding.

• Ask students to identify tools

and mechanics for wood

working

• Ask students to describe by

diagram thin frames segmental

and lagged patterns

• Ask students to describe how

supporting joints are

positioned.

• Various pattern

materials pattern

making tools and

machines

General Objective 3.0: Know the application and the different types of patterns


3

3.1 State the application of the types of pattern equipment 3.2 Describe the different types of patterns: rose patterns split patterns, skeleton patterns cope and drag patterns, match plates in hard wood and metal 3.3 State the application of various patterns in 3.2

• Ask students to state (1) types of pattern equipment (2) their applications • Ask students to describe the various types of patterns • Ask students to identify their advantages and disadvantages

128


(OPTION)



CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective 4.0: Know the properties of silica sand and other refractory materials


4

4.5 Explain the effects of heat upon

refractoriness and expansion characteristics

of silica sand

4.6 State the advantages of using: Zirconite,

chromite and other refractory materials in

preference to silica sand for mould and core

production

• Ask students to say what

they understand by

refractoriness


effects of heat on silica sand.

• Ask students to give the

advantages of zirconite,

chromite etc over silica sand.

General Objective 5.0: Understand the effects of day and other additives to moulding sand


5

5.1 Explain the influence of the following

types of day on the moulding properties of

day banded sand: Montmorillonite,

bentonite, kaodinite, hydromica, polymineral

clays, in naturally banded sands

5.2 State the effects of heat on day bonded

sands as in 5.1

5.3 Illustrate the effects of dead burnt clay

bond on mould materials.

5.4 State and explain the reasons for adding

coal, pitch, oil, flour, dextrin and starch to

day banded moulding sands.


influence of day type binders

on properties of moulding sand

• Ask students to give reasons

for the use of additives in day

banded moulding sands.

129


(OPTION)



CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective 6.0: Know mould and core making operations


6

6.1 Explain the following: (a) bedding in (b)

parting down (c) mould reinforcement.

6.2 Describe the following: (a) ramming

boards (b) odd sides (c) floor boards (d)

sloping pieces

6.3 Describe snap flasks slip flasks and

special moulding boxes

6.4 Describes the following (i) position of

joint (ii) construction of pattern (iii) loose

pieces (iv) core prints (v) core covers (vi)

cone prints (vii) stopping off pieces (viii)

template (ix) part-patterns.

6.5 Describe methods of pattern and

moulding box alignment

6.6 Explain the use of single and double

sited pattern plate (in metal and other

materials) and stripping plates.

6.7 Describe the following moulding

machines: jolting machines, sand slinger,

squeezes, jolt-squeeze machines, roll-over

machines, pattern draw machines silicate

and chemical hardening dispensing

machine.


bedding in, parting down and

re-inforcement in moulding is

done

• Ask students to: (1) identify

ramming boards odd sides

floor boards etc. (2) explain

their uses


snap flasks, slip flask, etc(ii)

explain how they are used


methods of pattern and

moulding box alignment.


single and double-sided

pattern plates, etc. (2) state

their uses.

• Ask students to (1) identify

the moulding machines (2)

Operate them

• Moulding machine

flask

130


(OPTION)



CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective 7.0: Know the criteria in the use of cupola and electric arc furnaces


7

7.1 Review principle types of melting

furnaces

7.2 Explain factors including causes that

influence the choice of melting furnaces

7.3 Describe with diagrams the methods of

heating and controlling the blast in a hot

blast cupola

7.4 State the functions of the electrodes in

an arc furnace.

7.5 Explain the necessity for water cooling

in arc furnaces

• Ask students to describe the operation of the common foundry melting units] • Ask students to produce a diagram of the cupola • Ask students to explain the necessity of oxygen enrichment of the blast. • Ask students to produce a diagram of the lay out • Ask students to distinguish between consumable and non-consumable electrodes • Ask students to describe the chemistry behind arc creation.

General Objective 8.0: Understand the structure and properties of cast iron


8

8.1 Draw and describe the iron carbon

equilibrium diagram

8.2 Classify cast iron.

8.3 Describe the structure of white cast iron

illustrating the main features

8.4 Describe the structure of Grey cast iron

illustrating the main features

8.5 Explain the reasons for the structural

difference between white and grey cast

irons by reference to phase diagram.

8.6 Discuss the properties and give

examples of uses of each category of cast

iron.

• Ask students to: (1) Draw the iron carbon equilibrium diagram (2) annotate it completely. • Ask students to distinguish between white and grey cast iron • Ask students to say what they understand by malleable cast iron. • Ask students to explain how grey and white cast irons are produced. • Ask students to compare the properties • Ask students to: (I) Compare their properties(ii) state their use

131


(OPTION)



CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective 9.0: Know the factors affecting the characteristics of steels


9

9.1 State the effects of composition on

casting temperature of plain carbon and low

alloy steels

9.2 Describe how costing temperatures of

steels affect the properties of mould and

their materials

9.3 Describe the running and feeding

system necessary for plain carbon and low

alloy steels.


effect of temperature on mould

and core materials.


basic elements of the gating

system.


use of riser, position in the

mould, etc.

• Ask students to”:(i) list the

basic heat treatment

procedures and(ii) describe

them

General Objective 10.0: Understand the principles of casting non-ferrous alloys


10

10.1 State the common effects of gas

content in aluminum alloys

• ask students to: (I) list the

common gas defects and(ii)

state methods of controlling

them

General Objective 11.0: Understand fettling


11

11.1 Describe the methods for removing

surplus metal from casting.

11.2 Isolate waste from re-cycle materials.

• Ask students to (I) list the

common finishing fettling tools

and machines(ii) state their

uses.

132


(OPTION)



CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective 12.0: Understand modern methods of production


12

12.1 Explain universal or rotary table moulding machines. 12.2 Describe conveyor type automatic moulding lines to produce small or medium size castings. 12.3 Draw and explain metal pattern plates and master pattern plates 12.4 Explain slip flask moulding and the use of automatic flask-less moulding machines of a high productive capacity. 12.5 Describe automatic lines which make flask less moulds with a vertically extending parting

• Ask students to: (I) Describe

the machining(ii) explain how

they work


necessity for automation.


slip flask moulding

• Ask students to list the

advantages of flaskless

moulding over flask moulding

General Objective 13.0: Understand machine core making


13

13.1 Explain the goal of using core making

machines

13.2 Describe core jarring machines

13.3 Sketch and describes core blowers.

• Ask students to explain the importance of core making machines • Ask students to sketch and describe core blower and are jarring machines

General Objective 14.0: Understand special production processes and their economic considerations


14

14.1 Describe centrifugal casting

14.2 Describe investment casting (lost-wax

process)

14.3 Describe die casting

14.4 Describe shell moulding

14.5 Describe CONCAST

14.6 Explain economic considerations of the

various processes.

• Ask students to (I) describe centrifugal casting(ii) state the advantages and disadvantages • Ask students to: (I) describe investment.(ii) state its advantages and disadvantages. • Ask students to explain when special casting processes and selected over hand moulding procedures

133


(OPTION)



CONTACT HRS 4 PER

WEEK


General Objective: 15.0 Determine the clay content of a clay-banded moulding sand.


15.1 Explain castings using sand moulds

containing varying amounts of additives.

15.2 Explain moulds using different

moulding technique

15.3 Explain cores using core boxes.

15.4 Calculate necessary alloy additions to

adjust the composition of non ferrous metals

and then melt and carry out alloying.

15.5 Design patterns for sand moulding.

• Ask students to explain clay

content of clay - banded

moulding sand.


design pattern for a given

component drawing.

• Clay bonded moulding

sand,

• Standard jar

• Melting furnace,

patterns Additives.

• Core sand

• Core boxes.

• Pattern material shrink

rate.

• Pattern making tools.


(OPTION)

Course: FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY & PRACTICE Course Code: MEM 323 Contact Hours:

1-1-2




1-5

1.1 Select pattern materials on the basis of overall

economic advantage and optimum performance.

1.2 Carryout the production of pattern from solid

materials.

1.3 Demonstrate the effects of dead burnt clay on

mould materials.

1.4 Identify and operate the following moulding

machines - jolting machine, sand slinger,

squeezes, jolt-squeeze machines, roll-over

machines, pattern draws machines, silicate and

chemical hardening dispensing machine.



and ask to carryout all the

activities.


• Various pattern

materials.

• Pattern working

tools and

machines.

• Moulding

machine flask.

134


(OPTION)

Course: FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY & PRACTICE Course Code: MEM 323 Contact Hours:

1-1-2




2.0 Identify the furnaces used in foundry

6-7

2.1 Demonstrate the general layout of an arc

furnace including equipment and plant.

• Demonstrate for the students

to learn and ask them to

perform the activity.

3.0 Demonstrate skills in the determination of clay content of a clay-bond sand

3.1 Produce castings using sand moulds containing

varying amounts of additives.

3.2 Produce moulds using different moulding

techniques.

3.3 Produce cores using core boxes.

3.4 Calculate necessary alloy additions to adjust

the composition of non-ferrous metals and then

melt and carry out alloying.

3.5 Design patters for sand moulding.


3.5 for the students to learning

and ask them to carry out the

activities.

• Clay bond

moulding

• Standard jar

• Melting furnace,

pattern

• Additives

• Core sand

• Core boxes

• Pattern material

shrink rate.

• Pattern making

tools.

135

Metrology


(OPTION)

COURSE: METROLOGY Course Code: MEM 411 Contact Hours:

3HRS/Week


General Objective: 1.0 Know the fundamentals of measurement Week


1

1.1 Describe workshop standards of length

1.2 List the sub-divisions of standard of length

1.3 Discuss the sub-divisions in 1.1


fundamentals of measurement

and give the standards of

length

• Comparator, Limit

gauges, Steel rule,

Dynamometer,

• Thermometer,

Thermocouple

• Pyrometer, Chalk,

Chalkboard, Vernier

caliper,

• Beuch testing

centres

General Objective 2.0: Understand the types and sources of errors


2

2.1 Describe the types of errors commonly

found in engineering measurement

2.2 Identify sources of errors in measurement

such as equipment errors, operational

interference, installation.

2.3 Explain means of over-coming errors

mentioned in 2.1 above.

2.4 Describe (drunken thread).


common sources of error and

how to over-come them

General Objective 3.0: Understand the constructional details of simple measuring instruments


3

2.4 Explain the principles construction and

operation of the following (a) dynamometer

(b) bourdon tube manometers (c)

thermometer, pyrometer, thermocouple etc.

• Ask students to draw and

explain the details of simple

measuring instruments


aid of diagrams the operation

of dynamometer bourdon tube

manometer etc.

136


(OPTION)


3HRS/Week


General Objective: 4.0 Understand the concept of quality, the importance and organization of quality

control


4

4.1 Explain quality control and related terminologies: durability, reliability interchangeability 4.2 Explain the measurement/testing of the parameters in 1.1. 4.3 State the scope and objectives of quality control and explain the work of the quality control department in a firm. 4.4 List the stages of the production process and explain the influence of each on the overall quality of a product. 4.5 List the factors that affect the quality of a product 4.6 Explain the relationship between quality and cost (of a product)

• Ask students to:

• Explain quality control using

the right terms.

• Ask students to describe how

to quantify quality control

• Ask students to list the work

of the quality control

department


production process affects

quality and relate this to cost.

• Chalk, Chalkboard,

Lecture note

General Objective 5.0: Understand the control of quality through specification of dimensions of

machines elements and sub-assembly (at design stage)


5 - 6

5.1 State importance of interchangeability of machine parts and elements with respect to the quality of a product. 5.2 State the necessity of imposition of tolerance on the size of elements. 5.3 Present graphically the position of tolerance in relation to “zero line” for various fundamental deviations. 5.4 State the meaning of “basic hole” and “basic shaft” and present their tolerance zones in graphical form. 5.5 Explain the notion of fit between two mating parts (shaft and hole) 5.6 Calculate the maximum and minimum clearance and interference for various fits.

• Ask students to explain specifications as it relate to dimensioning of machine elements and sub-assemblies. • Ask students to give appropriate tolerance on certain sizes of machine elements. • Ask students to explain ´basic hole’ and ´basic shaft’ and show their tolerances zones graphically • Ask students to draw and explain the notations for fit and show it on two mating parts (shaft and hole)

• Chalk

Chalk board

137


(OPTION)


3HRS/Week


General Objective 5.0: Understand the control of quality through specification of dimensions of

machines elements and sub-assembly (at design stage)


7

5.7 Distinguish between three types of fits

and give their examples in graphical form.

5.8 Explain the different between “Hole Basic”

and “Shaft basis” fits

5.9 Present graphically 2.8

5.10 Outline the main features of the ISO

system for limits and fits.

5.11 Explain why and on what principles that

vast number of possible ways to produce fits

(combination of all holes with each shaft) has

been constrained in practical standards to

some limited number of fits.

5.12 Explain when “Hole Basic” fits are

preferred to “Shaft Basic” fits and vice-versa.

5.13 Define the meaning of term

“Dimensional Chain”

5.14 Explain the linear difference between

constructional and technological dimensional

chains.

5.15 Perform calculations on tolerated

dimensions.

Calculate dimensional chains.

• Ask students to explain fits

and differentiate between Hole

basic and Shaft basic fits

graphically.

• Ask students to illustrate the

ISO system method for

describing limits and fits.


standards of fits.


examples of when Hole basic

is preferred to Shaft basic and

vice-versa.


between constructional and

technological dimensional

chains.

• Ask students to carry out

some calculations of

dimensional chains.

138


(OPTION)


3HRS/Week


General Objective 6.0: Understand the control of quality at the production and planning stages.


7

6.1 Distinguish between measurable

characteristics (variables) and non-

measurable (attributes) of a product.

6.2 Explain automatic inspection and

statistical method of control using charts

6.3 State the advantages and disadvantages

of the inspection methods in 3.1.

6.4 Select means of inspection measuring

instruments, gauging devices etc.

6.5 Explain the general theory of control

charts used in standards (e.g. BS 2564:

1969)

6.6 Construct control charts (graphs) for

sample average and sample range to monitor

process variation.

6.7 Construct fraction defective and number

defective control charts.

6.8 Interpret information derived from the

charts in 3.5 and 3.6

6.9 Explain the effect of the quality of

machine tools, cutting tools, jigs and fixtures

on the quality of the items produced


between measurable and non-

measurable characteristics of a

product.


difference between inspection

and statistical methods of

control.


advantages and disadvantages

of inspection method.


control charts using BS 2564:

1969 and ISO Ask students to

construct control charts for

monitoring process variation.

• Ask students to construct

fraction detective and number

defective control charts and

interpret the information.

• Ask students to explain effect

of quality of machine tools to

quality of products produced.

• Chalk

• Chalk board

139


(OPTION)


3HRS/Week


General Objective 7.0: Know how to measure and identify the accuracy grade of a thread.


8

7.1 List the type of thread gauges 7.2 Describe standards for thread gauges tolerances 7.3 Explain setting and adjustable and indicating thread gauges of both external and internal type. 7.4 Perform a gauging test on a thread 7.5 Measure the core and outer diameter on a thread. 7.6 Measure pitch on a thread. 7.7 Compare the measured parameters of a thread with standard values. 7.8 Using ring, snap and plug thread gauges to carry out a gauging process on bolts and nuts.

• Ask students to list types of gauges and describe standards used in thread gauge tolerance. • Ask students to carryout a gauging test on a thread and also measure the core outer diameter and pitch of the thread. • Ask students to compare the result from above to standard values. • Ask students to carryout gauging process on bolt and nuts using ring, snap and plug thread gauges.

• Chalk • Chalk board • Pitch measuring machine • Thread micrometer • Standard Ring gauges, • Bolts and Nuts.

General Objective 8.0: Know the principles and applications of comparators


9

8.1 Differentiate comparative measurement from direct measurement 8.2 List the essential elements of a comparator. 8.3 Explain the functions of each element as stated in 5.2. 8.4 Explain the design and principle of operation of three of the comparators: mechanical, electrical, and pneumatic. 8.5 List the merits and demerits of the comparators listed in 5.4. 8.6 Describe method of obtaining magnifications in the comparators listed in 5.4. 8.7 Describe the method of setting up the comparators for gauging shafts and holes. 8.8 Describe practical application of the comparatives listed in 5.4

• Ask students to differentiate between comparative measurement from direct measurement and also list the essential elements of a comparator • Ask students to explain the design principles and operation of Mechanical, Electrical and Pneumatic Comparators. • Ask students to describe methods of magnification and give merits and demerits of the three comparators.

Chalk, chalkboard

140


(OPTION)


3HRS/Week


General Objective 9.0: Understand the principles of angular measurement


10

9.1 List four angular measuring instruments

9.2 Explain the working principles of the

angular measuring instrument listed in 6.1

9.3 State the precautions to be observed

when using the angular measuring instrument

listed in 6.1.

9.4 State the functions of a gear

9.5 Define the elements and standard

proportion of gears.

9.6 Name the possible errors and deviations

on a gear affecting it’s accuracy and fit.

9.7 Explain the use of standards for

specifying the tolerance and fits of gears.

9.8 Describe a double flank test on a gear

and interpret the obtained graph.

9.9 Describe the method of measuring the

error of involute form on a gear tooth and

interpret the graph

• Ask students to list the different types of angular measuring instruments and explain their working principles. • Ask students to explain the care that must be taken in using angular measuring instrument • Ask students to explain different types of errors and deviation in gear that could affect its accuracy. • Ask students to give standards for specifying the tolerance and fits of gears. • Ask students to obtain graphs from double flank test on a gear • Ask students to determine error of involute from gear tooth and interpret the graph.

General Objective 10.0: Understand the measurement of gears and identify their accuracy grade


11


error of a pressure line and interpret the

graph.


base pitch on a gear.


simple and cumulative errors of circular pitch

and draw the graph and interpret.

10.4 Use the values measured to designate

the accuracy grade for the gear.

• Ask students to measure

base pitch on a gear simple

and cumulative errors of

circular pitch and interpret the

graphs.

• Ask students to use values

obtained to determine the

accuracy grade of the gear.

Chalk, chalkboard

141


(OPTION)


3HRS/Week


General Objective 11.0: Understand the principles of simple interferometric measurement


12

11.1 Explain the phenomenon of interferometry. 11.2 Explain the use of optical flat in measurement of small deviations in size, error of flatness and parallelism. 11.3 Describe the principles of design and operation of the NPL gauge interferometer and the diffractional method of slip gauge size evaluation. 11.4 Describe the principles of design and operational of the laser interferometer. 11.5 Describe other applications of laser interferometer like diffractional measurement and holography.

• Ask students to describe the phenomenon of interferometry • Ask students to explain the principles of operation of the NPL gauge interferometer and the fractional method of slip gauges. • Ask students to describe the working principle of laser interferometer and its applications.

General Objective 12.0: Know the purpose and types of alignment tests for common types of machine tools


13 - 15

12.1 State the purpose of no-load running tests. 12.2 State the purpose of practical alignment tests. 12.3 List and state the uses of the following equipment used for alignment tests: precision level, dial test indicator, test mandrel, straight edge and square. 12.4 Sketch and describe the following alignment tests for common machine tools (a) coaxial alignment (between axes) (b) parallelism (c) squareness or perpendicularity (d) concentricity and end float of spindles. 12.5 State the effect of alignment error on the workplace 12.6 Compare the results of the test in 9.6 with standard values in alignment charts and machine tool brochure.

• Ask students to explain the purpose of no-load running test and practical alignment tests. • Ask students to list and explain the uses of equipment used for alignment tests. • Ask students to report on the practicals of 9.6 and 9.7.

142


(OPTION)

Course: METROLOGY Course Code: MEC 411 Contact Hours:

2hrs/Week




1 - 5

1.1 Perform a gauging test on a thread.

1.2 Measure the core and outer diameter on a

thread.

1.3 Measure pitch on a thread.

1.4 Compare the measured parameters of a

thread with standard values.

1.5 Using ring, snap and plug thread gauges to

carry out a gauging process on bolts and nuts

1.6 Gauge shaft and classify them into limited

tolerance groups using an electrical comparator.

1.7 Gauge holes and classify them into limited

tolerance groups using a pneumatic comparator.

1.8 Use sine bars, slip gauges and precision

rollers to carry out angular measurement of an

object

• Ask students to list types of

gauges and describe standards

used in thread gauge tolerance

• Ask students to carryout a

gauging test on a thread and also

measure the core outer diameter

and pitch of the thread.


result from above to standard

values.

• Ask students to carryout

gauging process on bolt and nuts

using ring, snap and plug thread

gauges.

• Chalk

• Chalk board

• Pitch

measuring

machine

• Thread

micrometer

• Standard Ring

gauges, Bolts

and Nuts

6 - 10

1.9 Use monochromatic light source, optical

flats, optical parallels, slip gauge set and

interferometric outfit to perform the following

experiments:(i) measure the error of flatness of

slip gauges, micrometer measuring faces and

other flat reflecting surfaces.(ii) Measure the

error of parallelism of micrometer measuring

faces(iii) measuring small deviation in size and

small dimensions(iv) calibrate the micrometric

head.

• Ask students to set up

comparators for gauging shafts

and holes.

• Ask students to perform gauging

operations with the three

comparators


standard proportion of gears.

• Ask students to measure

involute form, tooth line errors and

base pitch error of a gear.

• Ask students to prepare reports

on the experiments of 8.6

143


(OPTION)

Course: METROLOGY Course Code: MEC 411 Contact Hours:

2hrs/Week




11 - 15

1.10 Use the involute testing machine to carry

out the measurement of the involute form; tooth

line errors and base pitch error of a gear.

1.11 Conduct practical test on the common

machine tools, centre lathe, drilling machine,

milling machine and shaping machine


following

(a) Coaxial

alignment

(b) Parallelism

(c) Squareness.

• Concentricity and end float of

spindles

144

Testing and Failure of Materials


(OPTION)

COURSE: TESTING AND FAILURE OF

MATERIALS Course Code MEM 412

Contact Hours 4

HRS/WK

COURSE SPECIFICATION THEORETICAL CONTENT

General Objective: Understand the causes and types of corrosion Week


1

1.1 List the principal types of

corrosion

1.2 Explain the causes of corrosion

1.3 Describe chemical corrosion

1.4 Describe electrochemical

corrosion

• Ask student to list the principal types

of corrosion

• Ask the student to explain the causes

of corrosion

• Ask students to describe chemical

corrosion

• Ask student to describe

electrochemical corrosion

• Ask student to distinguish between

direct and electro-chemical corrosion.

Chalk, Chalkboard,

Lecture note

2

2.1 Distinguish between direct and

electro-chemical corrosion

2.2 Discuss the relationship between

microstructure and corrosion

resistance.

2.3 Describe the fitting corrosion

2.4 Describe the effect of stress on

corrosion

• Ask student to discuss the

relationship between microstructure

and corrosion resistance.

• Ask student to describe the fitting

corrosion.

• Ask student to describe the effect of

stress on corrosion.

• Ask student to explain stress

corrosion and cavitation corrosion.

• Ask student to describe the different

method of corrosion prevention.

- do-

3.1 Explain stress corrosion and

cavitation corrosion.

3.2 Explain the effect of design on

corrosion

3.3 Describe the different method of

corrosion prevention

145


(OPTION)



Contact Hours 4

HRS/WK


General Objective: Understand the causes and types of corrosion Week


3- 4

4.1 Compare metallic and non-

metallic protection.


disadvantages of different methods

of corrosion protection.

4.3 Demonstration electroplating and

galvanic protection

• Ask student to compare metallic and

non-metallic protection.

• Ask student to compare the

advantages and disadvantages of

methods of corrosion protection.

• Ask student to demonstrate

electroplating and galvanic

-do-

General Objective 5.0: Understand the concept of fatigue failure


5

5.1 Describe what is meant by

fatigue failure

5.2 List sources of stress fluctuation

in engineering systems under service

conditions.

5.3 Describe the available types of

fatigue tests.

• Ask student to describe what is meant

by fatigue failure.

• Ask students to list sources of stress

fluctuation in engineering systems

under service conditions.

• Ask student to describe the available

types of fatigue stress.

-do-

General Objective 6.0: Understand how to interpret fatigue curves (5-m curves) and the factors

affecting endurance limit.


6

6.1 Draw typical 5-m curves for

readings in fatigue tests for ferrous

and non-ferrous materials.

6.2 Explain what is meant by fatigue

and endurance limits.

6.3 List and describe the factors

affecting endurance or fatigue limit.

• Ask student to draw typical 5-m

curves for readings in fatigue tests for

ferrous and non-ferrous materials.

• Ask student to explain what is meant

by fatigue and endurance limit.

• Ask student to list and describe the

factors.

- do -

146


(OPTION)



Contact Hours 4

HRS/WK


7.0 Understand the Phenomenon of cumulative damage in fatigue


7

7.1 Explain the phenomenon of

cumulative damage in fatigue.

7.2 Predict the fatigue life of

engineering. Component.

7.3 Describe creep failure.

• Ask student to explain the

phenomenon of cumulative damage in

fatigue.

• Ask student to predict the fatigue life

of an engineering component.

• Ask student to describe creep failure.

- do -

General Objective 8.0: Understand the mode of failure of engineering materials by creep.


8

8.1 Describe the 3 stages in creep.

8.2 Describe a typical creep test.

8.3 Sketch and explain a typical

creep curve

8.4 Describe the stages leading to

rupture of various materials

• Ask student to describe the three

stages in creep.

• Ask student to describe a typical

creep test.

• Ask student to sketch and explain a

typical creep curve.

• Ask student to describe the stages

leading to rupture of various materials.

- do -

General Objective 9.0: Understand the Properties of creep-resisting alloys.


9

9.1 List the characteristics of creep-

resisting alloys.

9.2 List alloys with good creep

resistance.

• Ask students to list the characteristics

of creep-resistance alloys

• Ask students to list alloys with good

creep resistance.

-Do-

147


(OPTION)



Contact Hours 4

HRS/WK


10.0 Understand the concept of Non-destructive Testing.


10

10.1 Explain Non Destructive tests

(NDT)

10.2 Discuss the financial and

economic aspects of NDT methods.

10.3 Describe the methods of

carrying out the following NDT:

a. Visual inspection

b. Magnetic dust

method

c. Dye Penetrant

d. Eddy Current

e. Ultrasonic

f. Radiography

• Ask student to explain NDT.

• Ask student to discuss the financial

and economic aspect of NDT methods.

• Ask students to describe the methods

of carrying out the following NDT.

i. Visual inspection

ii. Magnetic dust

method

iii. Dye Penetrant

iv. Eddy current

v. Ultrasonic

vi. Radiography

General Objective 11.0: Understand the advantages and disadvantages of Non-Destructive Testing

(NDT)


11

11.1 Describe the necessary

precessions required to obtain

maximum efficiency.

11.2 Explain the principles that

govern each of the tests mentioned

in 10.3

11.3 Discuss the limitation and

advantages of the test in 10.3 above.

• Ask student to describe the necessary

precisions required to obtain maximum

efficiency.

• Ask students to explain the principles

that govern each of the tests in 10.3

• Ask students to discuss the limitation

and advantages of the test in 10.3

148


(OPTION)



Contact Hours 4

HRS/WK


General Objective 12.0: Understand how to interpret the results of


12

12.1 Describe Destructive tests such

as:

a. Izod - charpy test

b. Hardness test

c. Tensile tests etc

• Ask students to describe destructive

terms such as

• Izod - charpy test(ii) Hardness test(iii)

Tensile test

• Izod- charpy

equipment

compression and

Tensile

• Testing machine

13

13.1 Explain the effect of strain rate

on the tensile test results

13.2 Explain the effect of over

straining/reacted loading on metals.

• Ask the students to explain the effect

of strain rate on the tensile test results.

• Ask the students to explain the effect

of over straining/reacted loading on

metals.

General Objective 14.0: Understand how to determine the Proof-stress using stress-strain curve.


14

14.1 Determine the proof stress

using stress strain curve.

14.5 Explain how impact test can

reveal the brittleness of materials.

• Ask students to determine the proof

stress using stress-strain curves.

• Ask student to explain how impact

test can reveal the brittleness of

materials.

• Ask student to ask question on areas

of difficulties.

- do -

149



MATERIALS COURSE CODE MEM 412 CONTACT HOURS

COURSE SPECIFICATION: PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objective 1.0: Understand how to find the material strength and properties from tensile test

experiment

Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teachers’ Activities Resources

1

1.1 Carryout tensile tests on selected

materials

1.2 Determine from the tensile test

result on metals the tensile strength,

yield strength, limit of proportionality,

proof stress, Young’s modulus,

percentage elongation, percentage

reduction in area, poison’s ratio.

• Ask student to carryout tensile tests

on selected materials.

• Ask student to determine from the

tensile test result on metals, the

tensile strength, yield strength limit of

proportionality, proof stress, Young

modulus, percentage elongation,

percentage reduction in area, poison’s

ratio.

• Compression and

Tensile testing

machine.

• Compression and

tensile testing

machine

General Objective 2.0: Understand the effect of Corrosion on the Mechanical Properties of Materials


2 - 3

2.1 Carryout experiment to

demonstrate electroplating and

galvanic protection

• Ask student to carryout experiment

to demonstrate electroplating and

galvanic protection.

• Ask student to subject a material to

corrosive environment and carryout

tensile and comprehensive test to

determine the effect of corrosion on

the mechanical properties of the

materials.

• Comprehension and

Tensile testing

machine.

4 - 5

3.0 Subject a material to corrosive

environment for a specific period and

carryout tensile test and

comprehension test to determine the

effect of corrosion on the mechanical

properties of the material.

150





General Objective 4.0: Understand how to determine fatigue and creep properties of material.


6

4.1 Carryout fatigue tests on different

tensile specimens and plot the various

5-m curves.

4.2 Analyse the results.

• Ask student to carryout fatigue tests on different tensile specimen and plot the various 5-m curves. • Ask the student to analyse the results above.

• Fatigue testing

machine

7 - 9

5.1 Carryout experiments to determine

creep curves for different materials

5.2 Demonstrate effect of temperature

on creep rate and plot creep strain -

time graphs for different temperature

for a metal.

• Ask the student to carryout

experimente to determine creep

curves for difference tensile.

• Ask student to demonstrate the

effect of temperature on creep rate

and plot creep strain - time graphs

• Creep measuring

apparatus

• Creep measuring

apparatus

General Objective 6.0: Understand how to determine the hardness properties of metals.


10-12

6.4 Carryout torsion, charpy and Izod test on selected materials 6.5 Carryout destructive tests to determine mechanical properties such as

(i) Brinell Hardness numbers (ii) Vickers Pyramid Hardness numbers (iii) Rockwell hardness number for different test pieces

• Ask students to carryout torsion,

charpy and Izod tests on selected

materials.

• Ask student to carryout destructive

tests to determine properties of

hardness measured in Brinell, Vickers

and Rockwell for different test pieces.

• Izod - charpy

apparatus

• Universal hardness

testing machine

General Objective 7.0: Carryout destructive tests to determine mechanical properties such as:


13

a. Brinell hardness numbers b. Vickers pyramid hardness numbers c. Rockwell hardness number or different test pieces.

151





General Objective 8.0: Understand how to carryout radiographic experiment


14 8.1 Demonstrate the effect of heat

treatment on Izod values

• Ask student to find the effect of heat

treatment on Izod values.

• Izod-charpy

equipment

15

9.0 Demonstrate the detection of

cracks on welds or castings by

radiographic means.

• Ask student to demonstrate the

detection of cracks on welds or

castings by radiographic means.

• Radiographic

equipment

152

Fluid Power Machines

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - PLANT (OPTION)

COURSE: FLUID POWER MACHINES Course Code: MEC 412 Contact Hours:

4HRS/WK L = 2 P = 2


General Objective: 1.0 Understand schematic Diagrams of Hydraulic & Pneumatic systems. Week


1 - 2

1.1 Draw and read different symbols

used in hydraulic and pneumatic circuits

(including general symbols, pumps,

motors, valves, filters etc)

1.2 Draw typical hydraulic and

pneumatic circuit diagrams for various

afflictions

1.3 Describe the working principles of a

typical hydraulic and pneumatic circuit.

1.4 Classify the various types of fluid

power machines e.g. tuabines, pumps,

compressors, fans.

1.5 Derive Euler equation for rotor

dynamic machines and describe the

components of these machines.

1.6 Determine force, power and

efficiency of hydraulic power machines.

1.7 Describe Pascal principle of

compatibility of power for presses and

lifters.

• Ask the student to draw and

symbols using hydraulics and

Pneumatic circuits.

• Illustrate activities 1.1 to 1.7

with diagrams and make notes

where necessary.


Recommended text

books, chalkboard, chalk,

lecture notes, etc.

153



4HRS/WK L = 2 P = 2


General Objective 2.0: Know the characteristics and components of fluid power systems


3 - 4

2.1 Draw the performance curve for (a) Service operation of fluid power system (b) Parallel operation of fluid power system

2.2 Explain the basic action of the following types of pumps (a) gear (b) sliding-vane (c) piston (d) screw. 2.3 Explain the action of the following types of actuators (a) single-acting actuators (b) double-acting actuators (c) compound activators. 2.4 Sketch the common types of pipe couplings and fittings. 2.5 State the needs for filtration and list types of filters. 2.6 Explain the following hydraulic properties

(a) viscosity (b) Lubricity (c) chemical stability (d) anti-foam.

2.7 Explain the advantages and dis-advantages of the following hydraulic fluids (a) water (b) mineral oil (c) glycol (d) phosphor base (e) emulsions

• Illustrate activities 2.1 to 2.6 with diagrams and make notes where necessary. • Assess the students.

• Chalk, chalk board, duster • Chalk, chalkboard, dusters.

5

2.8 Sketch and describe types of valves e.g. (a) directional control valves (b) pressure control (c) flow control valve. 2.9 Explain the operations of the types of valves in the categories in 2.8 2.10 Explain the principles of operation of directional control valves: 4 fist and 4 positions. 2.11 Sketch a reservoir detailing design features and fitment. 2.12 Sketch the layout of basic hydraulic circuit with two-three actuators and explain

• Illustrate activities 2.8 to 2.12 with diagrams and make notes.

• Different types of valves• Chalk, chalkboard, duster

154


COURSE: FLUID POWER MACHINES Course Code: MEC 412 Contact Hours: 4HRS/WK L = 2 P = 2


General Objective 3.0: Understand the working principles and detailed construction of automatic gearboxes.


6

3.1 Sketch the power flow and relative positions of clutches and brake bands for the following drives (a) low gear (b) intermediate gear (c) top gear (d) reverse gear (e) lock up (f) park. 3.2 Explain how gear selection is controlled hydraulically in (a) road speed (b) engine speed (c) the driver 3.3 Explain the need for the installation of an oil cooler

• Illustrate activities 3.1 to 3.3 with examples, diagrams and make notes.

General Objective 4.0: Know the operation, constructional details and performance characteristics of fluid coupling and torque converters.


7 - 8

4.1 State the purpose, benefits and limitations of the use of fluid coupling. 4.2 Sketch the layout of a fluid coupline. 4.3 Describe the operation of the fluid coupling. 4.4 Interpret a performance characteristic graph for fluid coupling. 4.5 State the purpose, benefit and limitations of a torque converter. 4.6 Sketch and describe the construction of a simple two-member torque converter. 4.7 Describe the operation and the power flow of torque converter in 4.6 above. 4.8 Sketch and describe the operation of a multi-stage torque converter and show when the power flow is (a) at stall (b) through the driving range (c) on over-run4.9 State the meaning and significance of (a) torque ratio (b) converter efficiency (c) coupling point 4.10 Derive equations for the terms in 4.9 above. 4.11 Interpret converter efficiency and torque ratio graphs.

• Illustrate activities 4.1 to 4.11 with diagrams and make notes. • Asses the students.

• Various hoses and fittings/couplings. • Used/serviceable automatic gear box • Chalk, Chalkboard, duster

155



4HRS/WK L = 2 P = 2


General Objective: 5.0 Know the arrangement and operation of valve body and the governing

systems used in automatic fluid Power system.


9

5.1 Discuss the factors affecting the

design of the hydraulic valve control

systems

5.2 State the function of the basic types

of hydraulic control valve body.

• Illustrate activities 5.1 to 5.7

with diagrams and make notes.

• Chalk, chalkboard,

duster

10

5.3 Sketch and describe the basic and

expanded circuits for 5.1 above.

5.4 Sketch and describe a typical

automatic transmission valve control

circuit.

5.5 Select a valve control for a specific

operation

5.6 Calculate valve area by

simultaneous equation.

5.7 Solve several related problems

156



4HRS/WK L = 2 P = 2


General Objective 6.0: Know the analysis and design of a hose coupling for commercial vehicle

applications


11 - 13

6.1 Explain the application of hydraulic

hose couplings in road Vehicles e.g. (a)

passengers cars (b) commercial

passenger and goods vehicles.

6.2 Describe the fabrication processes

used for constructing the basic hose

couplings.

6.3 Explain the limitations of the

processes in 6.2 above.

6.4 Describe the basic design

calculation for predicting (a) the

deformation (b) stress response in hose

during(i) fabrication(ii) in service loading

conditions.

6.5 Use the methods of 6.4 above to

solve hose coupling problems.

6.6 Carry out a design of a hose

coupling for (a) vehicle brake systems

(b) clutch systems (c) coupling the truck

to the transfer brakes.

6.7 Differentiate 6.6 (a &b) and discuss

methods for reinforcing the coupling

hose.

6.8 Describe the effects of surge

pressures in components of 6.6 above

and calculate (a) excess pressure

produce (b) water hammer effects (c)

pressure waves (d) frequency of wave

oscillations (e) bulk modulus.

6.9 Explain methods to reduce defects

in 6.8 above.

6.10 Describe the failure modes of

hydraulic hose in use.


application of hydraulic hose

couplings in road vehicles e.g.

(a) passengers cars (b)

commercial passenger and

goods vehicles.


......


limitations of the processes in

6.2 above.


calculation for predicting (a) the

deformation (b) stress response

in hose during(i) fabrication(ii) in

service loading conditions.

• Ask the students to use the

method 6.4 to solve hose

coupling problems.


6.6 (a &b) and discuss methods

for reinforcing the coupling hose.


methods to reduce defects in 6.8

above.


the failure modes of hydraulic

hose in use.


duster

157


COURSE: FLUID POWER MACHINES Course Code: MEC 412 Contact Hours: 4HRS/WK L = 2 P = 2


General Objective 7.0: Know the layout and operating principles of fluid power systems for utility vehicle application


14

7.1 Expand the hydraulic circuit in 1.2 to include (a) two valves in series (b) two valves in parallel 7.2 Use the circuits in 7.1 above for utility vehicle operations e.g. (a) for digger device system (b) for dump vehicle application 7.3 Describe the application of two or more directional valves connected in (a) series (b) parallel for application in utility vehicles

• Ask the students to expand the hydraulic circuit in 1.2 to include (a) two valves in series (b) two valves in parallel • Ask the students to use the circuits in 7.1 above for utility vehicle operations e.g. (a) for digger device system (b) for dump vehicle application • Ask the students to describe the application of two or more directional valves connected in (a) series (b) parallel for application in utility vehicles


duster

General Objective: 8.0 Understand different types of boilers, their fuels and the steam distribution system.


15

8.1 Describe the different types of boilers and characteristics of their fuels. 8.2 Describe with sketches the firing systems for solid, liquid and gaseous fuels. 8.3 Solve problems on boiler energy balance and draw the Sankay diagram. 8.4 Explain methods of boiler maintenance. 8.5 Analyze with sketches typical steam generation plant showing major components. 8.6 Describe with sketches the steam pipe layout and sizes.

• Ask the students to describe the different types of boilers and characteristics of their fuels. • Ask the students to describe with sketches the firing systems for solid, liquid and gaseous fuels. • Ask the students to carryout calculation on boiler energy balance and draw the Sankay diagram. • Ask the students to explain methods of boiler maintenance. • Ask the students to analyze with sketches typical steam generation plant showing major components. • Ask the students to describe with sketches the steam pipe layout and sizes.

158


(OPTION)

Course: Fluid Power Machines Course Code: MEC 412 Contact Hours: 2-0-2




1-2

1.1 Identify the following components of fluid power system. Its types and functions -

(a) Pumps (b) Turbines (c) Compressors (d) Fans (e) Actuators (f) Valves

1.2 Identify and sketch common types of pipe couplings and fittings. 1.3 Identify and sketch a simple two-member torque converter.

• Demonstrate activities 1.1 to 1.3 for

the students to learn and ask them to

perform the activities.


• Valves

• Pumps

• Compressors

• Fan actuators

• Pipe couplings and

fitting,

• Torque converter.

2.0 Analyse and design a hose coupling


3-6

2.1 Carryout a design of a hose

coupling for

(a) Vehicle brake

systems

(b) Clutch systems

(c) Coupling the truck

to the transfer brakes.

2.2 Carryout experiment to determine

(a) hose cycles live

versus pressure levels

(b) Pressure versus

failure frequency


the students to learn and allow them

to practise.


• Design materials

• Recommended

apparatus.

3.0 Demonstrate Skills in energy audit


7-14

3.1 Carryout a simple energy audit on a

typical plant

• Demonstrate activity 3.1 for the

students to learn and ask them to

carry out an exercise on energy audit.


• Energy audit

materials.

159

Machine Element Design

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MANUFACTURING

(OPTION)

COURSE: MACHINE ELEMENT DESIGN Course Code: MEM 413 Contact Hours: 6

HRS/WK

Course Specification: Theoretical

General Objective: The course is designed to give the students a working knowledge of the

approach to the design of machine elements Week


1

1.0 Machine Elements in Mechanical

Design

1.1 Define machine elements

1.2 List source machine elements

1.3 Discuss the build up of machine

elements to form sub-assemblies

1.4 Discuss the build up of sub

assemblies to form a

machine

1.5 List and explain the criteria for

machine Elements design.

1.6 Discuss the interplay of function,

strength, materials, manufacturing

facility and lost in Machine element

design.

• Ask students to define machine

elements

• Ask students to get source of

machine elements.

• Ask students to discuss the build up

machine elements to form sub-

assemblies

• Ask the students to list the relevant

criteria for the design of specific

elements

• Illustrate with diagrams

• Machine sub-

assembly

• Different

• Machine

• Element

• Mechanism models

• models

• Recommended

textbooks

• Lecture notes

• Chalkboard

• Chalk

General Objective: 2.0 Principle of joint design


2

2.1 Classify types of joint into

permanent and non-permanent

2.2 Describe different types of rivets

2.3 Calculate the dimensions of riveted

joints

2.4 Design bolted joints that are

subjected to tensile load and or torque.

• Ask the students to prepare

• Detailed drawings of the riveted joint

to standard practice

• Ask the students to prepare detailed

drawing of the bolted joints to

standard practice.

• Ask the students to prepare a brief

on the different types of thread.

- do -

160


(OPTION)


HRS/WK


General Objective: 3.0 Know Power transmission and Couplings design


3

3.1 Explain the principles of operation

of different types of transmission-

friction, drive, cylindrical and conical,

belt drive, keys and coupling, etc.

3.2 List examples of the use of these

devices

3.3 Describe the stress on the different

types of couplings.

• Ask the students to draw and

dimension a key and belt drive.


- do -

General Objective: 4.0 V-belts and Chain drives design


4

4.1 Describe v-belt and chain drives

4.2 Describe the V-belt drive in terms

of normal design parameters

4.3 State the standard dimensions of v-

belts rated A,B,C,Z,Y.

4.4 Classify chains and sprockets.

4.5 State the criteria for the design of

chain drives

4.6 Describe the following lubrication

(a) Methods of chain

drives

(b) Drip feed

lubrication

(c) Shallow belt

lubrication

(d) Disc or shinger

lubrication

4.7 Describe oil stream lubrication.

• Ask the students to draw a typical

arrangement of the elements of a belt

and a v-belt drive indicating typical

belt section and groove geometry.

• Ask the students to calculate the

design parameters of given v-belt

drive.

• Illustrate with diagrams and make

notes.

161


(OPTION)


HRS/WK


General Objective: 5.0 Understand the types and design of clutches


5

5.1 List types of clutches plate-type,

cone-type, slip-clutch, air-

actuated type etc

5.2 State the performance parameters

involved in the rating of clutches

5.3 Describe two basic methods used

to determine torque capacity required

of a clutch

5.4 Describe the application of clutches

in 5.1 above

• Ask the students to sketch different

types of clutches; shimmy there is

improvement parts.

• Ask the students to carry out

detailed calculations on a given clutch

General Objective 6.0: Know the types and design of Brakes


6

6.1 List types of brake systems in use

e.g., friction type, plate type, cone type

etc.

6.2 State the performance parameters

involved in the design and rating of

brake systems

6.3 Describe the applications of each

type of brake system in 6.1 above

• Ask the students to sketch the brake

system enumerated

• As the student to carryout detailed

calculation on a given brake supplier

• In particular the should design brake

for a given body in motion

• Photographs and

drawing of brakes

162


(OPTION)


HRS/WK


General Objective 7.0: Know the types and design of Gears


7

7.1 List types of gear systems e.g. spur

- gear, level gear, worm gear etc

7.2 Describe gear troth features e.g.,

pitch, not Diameter etc.

7.3 State the calculations required to

completely determine the gear

characteristics

7.4 Represent on a diagram forces

along on gear teeth and perform stress

calculations

7.5 Analyse stresses in gear teeth and

perform stress calculation

• Ask the students to identify the gear

types listed

• Ask the students to draw gear

profiles including the kinematics

• Ask the student to calculate for a

given gear circular pitch, diametral

pitch addendum and dedendum

clearance, outer diameter, root

diameter, tooth

• Thinness, tooth in-depth

• Ask the students to draw the above

gear wheel.

• Ask the students to draw gear trains

such as double reduction gear train

and double reduction gear train with

adder

General Objective 8.0: Understand the working principles of Gear Trains


8

8.1 Describe the working principle of

gear trains

8.2 Define velocity ratio Train valve

and derive

their expression for gear in week

• Ask the students to design a gear

box and prepare comprehensive

drawings for it

163


(OPTION)


HRS/WK


General Objective: 9.0 Know the types, selection and design of Bearing


9

9.1 Define bearings

9.2 List the various types of bearings

9.3 Classify bearing based on the

direction of forces acting on the shaft

9.4 Discuss the engineering situations

where different types of bearings are

used

9.5 Describe the essential features of

the bearings in 9.2 above

9.6 Explain the criteria for bearing

selection

• Ask students to define bearing

• Ask students to list various types of

bearing

• Ask students to classify bearing

based on the direction of shaft.

• Ask student to describe essential

features of the bearing in 9.2 above.

• Ask students & to explain the criteria

for bearing selection.

• Recommended

textbooks,

• Lecture notes

• Chalk and

chalkboard

• Duster.

General Objective 10.0: Understand Stress Concentration


10

10.1 Describe the phenomenon of

stress concentration

10.2 Discuss engineering situations

where stress concentrations

occur e.g. stepped shaft, plate with a

hole, notch or coracle

on a surface, intersections of solid

profiles etc.

10.3 Define the term stress

concentration faction SCF.

10.4 Discuss the types of loading

• Ask the students to extent from

engineering data stress Concentration

factors for common components

164


(OPTION)


HRS/WK


General Objective 11.0: Understand Design of shafts


11 - 12

11.1 Describe the essential functions

performed by a shaft in a

machine

11.2 Describe the common mounting of

a shaft,

11.3 Describe the reduction of a

physical shelf system to a

mathematical model for analyse

11.4 Discuss the parameters and

criteria for the design of a shaft in

accordance with standard engineering

practice

• Ask the students to sketch the

physical features of various shafts in

location

• Ask the students to carry out basic

analysis of shafts

• Ask the students to design a shaft

for a given duly and prepare

appropriate engineering drawing s for

it

General Objective: 12.0 Know Properties Of Lubricants


13 - 14

12.1 Define lubricants

12.2 State the types of lubricants

Commonly used in machines e.g. oil,

grease ol must solid lubricants.

12.3 Describe the characteristics of

lubricant in 12.2

12.3 Explain the criteria for selecting

lubricants e.g. operating conditions like

speed, load, lubricant properties,

surface quality

12.4 Describe, surface quality

lubrication mixed lubrication mixed

lubrication fluid film lubrication


lubricants in machine tools e.g. spindle

oil hydraulic oil gear oil slide-way oil

• Ask the students to observe the

difference in density and viscosity of

various grades of oil

• Ask the students to select lubricants

for given situations

• Different types of

lubricants

165


(OPTION)

Course: Machine Element Design Course Code: MEM 413 Contact Hours: 2-0-

4




1-2

1.1 Identify permanent and non-permanent

joints

1.2 Carryout the design of bolted joints

that are subjected to tensile load and or

torque.

• Demonstrate activities 1.1 and 1.2


them to perform the activities.

• Riveted joints

• Welded joints

• Bolted joints

• Design materials,

etc.

2.0 Demonstrate skills in the design of couplings


3

2.1 Identify different couplings

2.2 Identify criteria used in coupling design

2.3 Carryout design of couplings.

2.4 Analyse the stress on the different

types of coupling.





• Couplings

• Practical guide.

3.0 Demonstrate skills in Belts and chain design


4

3.1 Identify V-belt and chain drives 3.2 Identify chains and sprockets 3.3 Identify the criteria for the design of belt and chain drives 3.4 Carryout the selection and design of belt and chain drives 3.5 Point out area of lubrication of belt and chain drives




• Belts

• Chains

• Sprockets


• Practical guide

4.0 Demonstrate Skills in the design of clutches


5-6

4.1 Identify different types of clutches - Plate type - Cone type - Slip clutch - Air - a - chated

4.2 Identify and select the parameters in the rating and design of clutches. 4.3 Carryout the design of a clutch.



them to practise the activities.

• Clutches


• Practical guide

166


(OPTION)

Course: Machine Element Design Course Code: MEM 413 Contact Hours: 2-0-

4


5.0 Demonstrate Skills in the design of Brakes


7

5.1 Identify the types and application of

brake items - friction, plate, cone types.

5.2 Identify and select the parameters in

the design and rating of brake systems.

5.3 Carryout the design of a complete

brake system


and for the students to learn and

ask to perform he activities.


• Brake system

dismantled from a

vehicle

• Models


• Practical guide

6.0 Demonstrate skills in the design of Gears and Gear trains


8-10

6.1 Identify different types of gears - spur,

Bavel, warm, etc

6.2 Identify and select the parameters

involved in the design of gears and gear

trains.

6.5 Analyse stresses in gear teeth and

perform stress calculation.

6.6 Carryout a design of gear box and

prepare its working drawing


for the students to learn and ask to



• Spur, Bevel, worm

gears

• Different gear

trains models

• Practical guide

• Design materials.

7.0 Demonstrate skills in the design of bearings and shaft


11-14

7.1 Identify different types of bearings and

shafts

7.2 Identify the criteria for selection and

design of bearings and shafts in

accordance with standard engineering

practice.

7.3 Carryout the design of bearings and

shafts and prepare its working drawings.

7.4 Select appropriate lubricants for

bearings and shaft.





• Models of bearings

and shaft

• Practical guide

• Design materials.

167

Engineering Materials and Application

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENIGNEERING - MANUFACTURING

(OPTION)

COURSE: ENGINEERING MATERIALS

AND APPLICATION COURSE CODE: MEM 415

CONTACT

HOURS: 2HRS/WK

Course specification: Theoretical Content

General Objective 1.0: Understand ferrous materials Week


1-3

1.1 Explain the allotropic nature of

iron

1.2 Draw and explain the iron-carbon

phase diagram

1.3 Define steel

1.4 Classify plain carbon steels and

describe the mechanical properties

as a function of composition and

structure

1.5 State the uses and limitations of

plain carbon steel in engineering

applications

• Let the students explain the allotropic

nature of iron

• Ask the students to draw and explain the

iron-carbon phase diagram

• Ask the student s to define steel

• Ask the student to classify plain carbon

steels and describe the mechanical

properties as a function of composition

and structure

• Ask the students to state the uses and

limitations of plain carbon steel in

engineering applications.

• Chalk

• Chalkboard

• Recommended

textbooks

• Duster

4-7

1.6 Define alloy steel

1.7 Classify alloy steels

1.8 State typical alloying elements

and their effect on the

structure/property of steel

1.9 Classify alloying elements based

on the ability to

a. Stabilise carbides

b. graphite carbides

c. stabilise austenite

d. stabilise ferrite

• Ask the student to define alloy steel

• Ask the students to classify alloy steel

• Explain and ask the student s to state

typical alloying elements and their effect

on the structure and properties of steel.

• expose the student to classify plain

carbon steels and describe the

mechanical properties as a function of

composition and structure

• Ask the students to state the uses and

limitations of plain carbon steel in

engineering applications.

• Ask the students to classify alloying

elements based on the based on the

ability to stabilise carbide, austenite and

ferrite, and also graphite carbide.

- do -

168

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENIGNEERING - MANUFACTURING

(OPTION)

COURSE: ENGINEERING MATERIALS

AND APPLICATION COURSE CODE: MEM 415

CONTACT

HOURS: 2HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Understand ferrous materials Week


1.10 Use TTT-Curve to illustrate the

effects in 1.8

1.11 State various engineering

applications of the following alloy

steels (a) low alloy steels (b) high

alloy steels like stainless steel,

manganese steel, heat resisting

steel, tool steel

1.12 Define cast iron and draw iron

graphite equilibrium diagram Explain

the two forms of carbon in carbon in

cast iron and factors affecting their

states

1.13 Describe the following cast iron

varieties and their uses:

a. Malleable cast iron

b. Spheroidal

graphite cast iron

c. Flake graphite

cast iron

1.14 Define cast iron

1.15 Describe the following cast iron

varieties and their uses

a. Pearlitic iron

b. Nodular

c. Martensitic iron

d. Austenistic iron

• Ask the student to use TTT-Curve to

illustrate the effects in 1.8.

• Ask the students to state various

engineering applications of the following

alloy steels (a) how alloy steels

• high alloy steels like stainless, managing

steel,heat resisting steel, tool steel

• Ask the students to define cast iron and

draw - graphite equilibrium diagram

• Describe and ask the students to explain

the two forms of carbon in cast iron and

factors affecting their states

• Ask the students to describe the

following cast iron varieties and their

uses: malleable cast iron Spheroidal

graphite cast iron flake graphite cast iron

• Ask the students to define cast iron


following cast iron varieties and their

uses:

Pearlitic iron

Martensitic iron

169

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENIGNEERING - MANUFACTURING (OPTION)

COURSE: ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND APPLICATION

COURSE CODE: MEM 415 CONTACT HOURS: 2HRS/WK


General Objective 2.0: Know Non - ferrous metals


7-8

2.1 List various grades of commercial copper(e.g. tough pitch copper, deoxidised copper and oxygen - free high conductivity copper) 2.2 State engineering application of the grades in 2.1 above 2.3 Define brass 2.4 Draw and explain the copper/Zinc equilibrium diagram 2.5 State the properties and engineering applications of brass

• Ask the students to list various grades of commercial copper (e.g. tough pitch copper, deoxidised copper and oxygen-free high conductivity copper) • Ask the students to state engineering application of the grades in 2.1 above • Ask the students to define brass • Ask the students to draw and explain the copper/Zinc equilibrium diagram • Ask the students to state the properties and engineering applications of brass

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - MANUFACTURING (OPTION)

Course: ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND APPLICATION

Course Code: MEM 415 Contact Hours: 1hrs/wk


General Objective 1.0 Identify ferrous materials Week


1 - 8

1.1 Construct iron-carbon phase diagram 1.2 Identify alloying elements based on the ability to

(a) Stabilise carbides (b) Graphite carbides (c) Stabilize austerite (d) Stabilize ferrite

1.3 Use TTT-curve to illustrate the effects of alloying elements and their effect on the structure and property of steel. 1.4 Identify the following:

(a) low alloy steel (b) high alloy steel (c) cast iron (d) pearlitic iron (e) martenitic iron (f) austenistic iron

• Demonstrate activities 1.1 to 1.4 for the students to learn and ask them to carryout the activities. • Assess the students.

• Practical guide • Specimens of all the ferrous materials.

170


(OPTION)

Course: ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND

APPLICATION Course Code: MEM 415

Contact Hours:

1hrs/wk


2.0 Identify non-ferrous metal


9 - 15

2.1 Construct copper-zinc phase diagram

2.2 Identify various grades of commercial

copper

- tough pitch copper

- doxided copper and

- oxygen free high

conductivity copper

2.3 Identify brass and its alloys





• Practical guide

• Specimens of the

non-ferrous metals.

171

Machine Tools Systems


(OPTION)

COURSE: MACHINE TOOLS SYSTEMS COURSE CODE: MEM 421 CONTACT

HOURS: 2HR/WK

Course Specification THEORETICAL CONTENT

General Objective: 1.0 Understand the principle of automatic control and its applications in machine

tools (and transfer lines) Week


1

1.1 Explain the concept “automatic

control”

1.2 Distinguish between the degrees

of control (non-mathematics

treatment) of a machine tool in (a)

manual control (b) Semi-automatic

control (c) fully automatic control

1.3 State the factors to be considered

which justify the use of automatic

control

• Ask the students to explain the concept

“automatic control”

• Ask the students to distinguish between

the degrees of control (non-mathematics

treatment) of a machine tool in

i. Manual control

ii. Semi-automatic control

iii. Fully automatic control

Chalk

chalkboard

Recommended

textbooks.

2

1.4 State the principles of control

systems and give examples of their

application to the control of position

and speed

• Ask the students to state the factors to

be considered which justify the use of

automatic control

• Ask the students to state the principle of

control systems and give examples of

their application to the control of position

and speed

172


(OPTION)


HOURS: 2HR/WK


General Objective 2.0: Understand the application of various systems in the operation and control of

machine tools


4 - 6

2.1 Describe the characteristic features of the following systems used in the operation and control of machine tools (a) hydraulic (b) pneumatic (c) mechanical (d) electronic 2.2 Distinguish between the following hydraulic systems: (a) hydrostatic (b) hydrodynamic 2.3 Explain the reasons for the use of the systems in 2.1 mentioning any limitations and giving typical examples of their application in machine tools (for the operation and control of machine tools)

• Explain and ask the students to describe the characteristic features of the following used in the operation and control of machine tools hydraulic (b) pneumatic (c) mechanical (d) electronic • Ask the students to distinguish between the following hydraulic systems (a) hydrostatic (b) hydrodynamic • Ask the students to explain the reasons for the use of the systems in 2.1 mentioning any limitations and giving typical examples of their application in machine tools (for the operation and control of machine tools) • Ask the students to produce typical line diagrams of hydraulic and pneumatic circuits

• Chalk

• chalkboard

General Objective 3.0: Understand the operation and control of numerically controlled machine tools

and their application to the Machining of typical components


7

3.1 Describe a numerically controlled machine tools 3.2 Explain the operating principle of numerically controlled machine tools 3.3 Explain the binary numerical system and its application to tape coding 3.4 Explain monitoring systems (a) analogue (b)digital 3.5 Explain the operation of the following monitoring device-position transducers rotary type (b) optical gratings

• Ask the students to describe a

numerically controlled machine tools

• Ask the students to explain the operating

principle of numerically controlled

machine tools

• Ask the students to explain the binary

numerically system and its application to

tape coding

• Chalk

• chalkboard

173


(OPTION)


HOURS: 2HR/WK


General Objective 3.0: Understand the operation and control of numerically controlled machine tools

and their application to the Machining of typical components


8

3.6 State the principles and

applications of (a) point to point

positioning control (b) continues path

control

• Explain and ask students to repeat

explanation on monitoring systems

analogue (b) digital

• Ask students to explain the operation of

the following monitoring devices-position

transducers (a) rotary type (b) optical

gratings

• Ask the students to state the principles

and applications of (a) point to point

positioning

• Control Continues path control

9

3.7 Explain the influence of NC

machines on drawing office practice

3.8 Explain the importance of

ordinate planning and calculating in

component drawings

3.9 Justify the use of NC machine in

preference to conventional machines

3.10 Explain the operation of a

machining centre

• Ask the students to explain the influence

of NC machine son drawing office

practice


importance of ordinate planning and

calculating in component drawing s

• Ask the students to justify the use of NC

machine in preference to conventional

machines

• Ask the students to explain the operation

of a machining centre

• Chalk

• chalkboard

174

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - MANUFACTURING (OPTION)

COURSE: MACHINE TOOLS SYSTEMS COURSE CODE: MEM 421 CONTACT HOURS: 2HR/WK


General Objective 4.0: Understand the application and operation of single spindle automatic lathe to the machining of typical components


10

4.1 Define automatic 4.2 Explain the operating principles of the following automatic machines (a) indexing turret (b) sliding headstock 4.3 Specify the type of work suitable for the machines in 4.4 Describe typical tool used on the machine listed in 4.2 4.5 Prepare sequence of operations, including non-productive time, to produce a simple component on a turret type automatic lathe 4.3 Calculate cycle time for he production of a component from given data 4.7 Sketch the cam layout from given data

• Ask the students to define automatic • Ask the students to explain the operating principles of the following automatic machine (a) indexing turret sliding headstock • Ask the students to specify the type of work suitable for the machine in 4.2 • Ask the students to identify typical tools used on the machines listed in 4.2 • Ask the students to prepare sequences of operations, including non-productive time, to produce a simple component on a turret type automatic lathe • Ask the students to calculate cycle time for the production of a component from given data • Ask students to draw the cam layout form given data

• Chalk • chalkboard

General Objective 5.0: Understand the principle and application of transfer machining


11-13

5.1 Define transfer machining 5.2 Describe the basic units of a transfer machine 5.3 State the advantages and limitations in the use of transfer machining 5.4 Explain the operation of the following transfer machining systems (a) in - line (b) rotary-type (c) drum (d) turret 5.5 Give examples of typical components that can be produced on the machine in 5.4

• Ask the students to define transfer machining • Ask the students to describe the basic units of a transfer machine • Ask the students to state the advantages and limitations in the use of transfer machining • Ask the students to explain the operation of the following transfer machining systems (a) in-line (b)rotary-type (c) drum (d) turret • Ask the student students to give examples of typical component that can be produced on the machines in 5.4

• Chalk • Chalkboard

175


(OPTION)

Course: MACHINE TOOLS SYSTEMS Course Code: MEM 413 Contact Hours:

2-0-4


General Objective 1.0 Demonstrate skills in construction of control circuits Week


1-5

1.1 Construct hydraulic and pneumatic circuits to

operate a semi-automatic and fully automatic cycles.

1.2 Produce typical line diagrams of hydraulic and

pneumatic circuits for the moving parts of a machine

tool and explain the purposes and functions of the

essential items in the circuit.



ask them to perform the

activities.


• Practical

guide

• Drawing

materials.

2.0 Demonstrate skills in the operation and control of NC machine tools

6-9

2.1 Prepare a point to point programme from a

simple component drawing (using CNC machine

languages) e.g. Heindemhani Plain language, etc.)

* Demonstrate activity 2.1 for


them to practice.

3.0 Demonstrate Skills in the use of single spindle lathe to machine typical components

10-15

3.1 Identify the following automatic machine tool -

(a) indexing turret

(b) sliding headstock

3.2 Identify typical tool used on the automatic

machine tools.

3.3 Prepare sequence of operation, including none

productive time, to produce a simple component on

a turret type automatic lathe.

3.4 Draw the can layout from given data.

Demonstrate activities 3.1 to


ask them to carryout the

activities.

Assess the students

• Turret lathe

machine

• Cutting tools

• Practical

guide.

176

Steam Power Engineering

PROGRAMME: HND MECHANICAL EGINEERING (PLANT OPTION)

COURSE: STEAM POWER ENGINEERING CODE: MEP 426 CONTACT

2HRS/WK


General Objective 1.0: Understand water supply sources and treatment. Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Resource

1

1.1 State sources of water supply, public

water supply, wells, bore hole, ponds,

dams, rivers, rain etc.

1.2 State the means of getting water

supply to boilers.

1.3 Identify means of storing water before

and after treatment.

1.4 Explain with sketches the three

processes of water treatment for human

consumption and industrial use: filtration,

sterilisation and softening

• Ask the students to explain with

sketches the three processes of

water treatment for human

consumption and industrial use;

filtration, sterilization and softening

• Visit to water treatment plant. • INo. Steam Power Plant. • INo. Steam Boiler, INo. Burner • INo. Control value, INo. Relief value • Feed pump, Water Treatment outfit • Raw water pumps • Air Heats, Economics, Superheated • Steam Pipes with Lagging, Calorifiers • Steam Traps • De-aerators • Pressure • Reducing values • Separators.

General Objective 2.0: Understand boiler feed pumps.


2

2.1 State different types of boiler feed

pumps.

2.2 Explain with sketches the

constructional details, characteristics

operation and installation of:

a. Centrifugal

b. Rotary

c. Reciprocating and

d. Submersible pumps

• -Ask students to identify and

explain with sketches the

construction and details

characteristics of operation and

installation of (i) centrifugal (ii) rotary

(iii) reciprocating and (iv)

submersible pumps

• Recommended

textbooks

• Lecture notes

• Chalkboard

• Chalk

177



2HRS/WK


General Objective 3.0: Know the different types of fuels used in boilers and furnace fires.


3

3.1 Describe the different types of fuel

preparation for boiler firing.

3.2 Describe the different types of fuels

used in boiler

3.3 Explain the different methods of fuel

storage for boiler operations.

3.4 Describe with sketches the firing

systems for solid, liquid and gaseous

fuels.

3.5 State the means of regulation of

furnace temperature.

3.6 Carry out inspection and repair of

furnaces and burners on boilers.

3.7 Carry out texts to determine the

properties of boiler fuels.


different types of fuel preparation for

boiler firing.


notes

• Recommended

textbooks

• Lecture notes

• Chalksboard

• Chalk

• duster

General Objective 4.0: Know different types of boilers for low and high-pressure generation of steam.


4.1 Describe with sketches different types

of boilers for various uses.

4.2 Describe with sketches boiler

mountings, fittings, and accessories like

super heaters, economisers air heaters,

feed pumps, safety values and safety

values etc.

4.3 State the functions of boiler house

instruments.

4.4 Specify general inspection of boilers

4.5 Carry out calculation on boiler energy

balance and draw the Sankey diagram

4.6 Explain methods of boiler

maintenance


• Describe with the aid of sketches a

condensate

• return of steam circuit.

• Describe with sketches different

types of boilers for various uses.


notes.

178



2HRS/WK


General Objective: 5.0 Know and understand steam distribution in industrial and domestic circuits


5.1 Describe with aid of sketches a

condensate return of steam circuit.

5.2 State the functions of heaters.

5.3 Describe with sketches the domestic

and industrial cabrifiers (non-storage and

storage).

5.4 Explain the operation of different

laundry machines, kitchen equipment,

and process heat.

5.5 Analyse with sketches, typical circuits

incorporating the following steam traps

separators air vent, pressure reducing

valves, radiators, provision for drainage

and de-acration.

5.6 State the use of low pressure exhaust

steam and control valve.

5.7 Describe with sketches the steam

pipe layout and sizes.

5.8 Explain with sketches various types

of pipe joint for steam circuit.

• Illustrate with diagrams activities

5.1 to 5.8 and make notes.

• Illustrate with good diagrams and

make notes.


• Recommended

text books

• Lecture notes

• Chalkboard

• Chalk

• Duster.

179


(OPTION)

Course: STEAM POWER ENGINEERING Course Code: MEM 426 Contact Hours:

1HR/WK


General Objective 1.0 Demonstrate skills in the maintenance of Boiler feed pumps. Week


1 - 5

1.1 Identify types of Boiler feed pumps 1.2 Master the operation and installation of -

(a) Centrifugal (b) Rotary (c) Reciprocating and (d) Submersible pumps

1.3 Carry out trouble shooting and maintenance of each of the pumps above.

5 Demonstrate activities 1.1 to 1.3 for the


perform all the activities.

6 Assess the students.

• Centrifugal

pumps

• Rotary pumps

• Reciprocating

pump

• Submersible

pumps

• Complex toolbox

2.0 Demonstrate skills in the maintenance of boilers and furnace fires

6 - 10

2.1 Identify the means of regulation of furnace temperature 2.2 Carryout inspection and repair of furnaces and burners on boilers 2.3 Carryout test to determine the properties of boiler fuels 2.4 Identify types of boilers for various uses 2.5 Identify the functions of boiler house instruments. 2.6 Carryout inspection and repairs of boilers.

• Demonstrate activities 2.1 to 2.6 for the


carryout the activities.


• Boilers and

accessories

• Furnaces and

accessories

• Complete

toolbox.

3.0 Demonstrate skills in distribution of steam in industrial and domestic circuits

11-15

3.1 Identify various methods of

expansion and anchorage for main

branch supply lines and pipe lagging.

3.2 Carryout exercises on steam pipe

layout with all the valves and trap

connections.

3.3 Visit industries to see the work of

steam circuits.

• Demonstrate activities 3.1 and 3.2 for

the students to learn, ask them to

perform the activities and conduct a visit

to industries to see the work of steam

circuits.

• Practical guide

• Steam pipe

layout.

180

PROGRAMME: HND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (PLANT OPTION)

Course: MACHINE TOOLS PROCESSES Course Code: MEC 422 Contact Hours:

1hr/wk


General Objective: 1.0 Understand the theory of metal cutting Week


1

1.1 Name and describe three types of

chip formation.

1.2 List the factors responsible for the

three types of formation

1.3 Distinguish the merits and demerits

of the above

1.4 Explain orthozonal and oblique

cutting.

1.5 Analyse cutting action using

merchant theory

• Ask students to carry out experiment

involving Tool Dynamometer to measure

the actual speed, force etc.

• Tool

Dynamometer

General Objective: 2.0 Know the uses and Properties of cutting tools


2

2.1 Select single point and multi-tooth

cutting tool for use

2.2 Select types of cutting tool

(materials)e.g. H.S.S ceramic and

tungsten - carbide for specific

application

2.3 Describe the general properties

required of a cutting tool

2.4 Explain the geometry of single point

cutting tool using nomenclature

2.5 Explain the specification of various

types of cutting tools in TSO standard

system.

2.6 State the factors which affect tool

life

• Ask the students to select single point

and multi-tooth cutting tool for use

• Ask the students to Explain types of

cutting tool (materials)e.g. H.S.S ceramic

and tungsten - carbide for specific

application

• Ask the student to describe the general

properties required of a cutting tool


geometry of single point cutting tool using

nomenclature


specification of various types of cutting

tools in TSO standard system.

• Ask the students to state the factors

that affect tool life.

181



1hr/wk


General Objective: 3.0 Understand the operation and application of capstan and turret lathes


3

3.1 Describe capstan and turret lathes

3.2 Compile:

a. block diagram of a

capstan lathe to show

the motions and

adjustments, the

arrangement of steps;

b. a schematic diagram

to show the power

transmission from the

input shaft to the work

and to the cutting tools

3.3 Explain the differences between a

capstan and turret lathe, and state the

applications of each.

3.4 Identify the purpose of the following

common tools boxes, dia heads, floating

reamers, knee holders, boring bars,

form tool holders etc.

3.5 List three types of chalcks and state

their uses.

3.6 State the uses of driving dog and

fish plate.

3.7 Define floor to floor time for

machining a component.

• Ask the students to describe capstan

and turret lathes

• Ask the students to compile

a. block diagram of a

capstan lathe to show

the motions and

adjustments, the

arrangement of steps;

b. schematic diagram to

show the power

transmission from the

input shaft to the work

and to the cutting tools


differences between a capstan and turret

lathe, and state the applications of each.

• Ask the students to identify the purpose

of the following common tools boxes, dia

heads, floating reamers, knee holders,

boring bars, form tool holders etc.

182



1hr/wk


General Objective: 4.0 Understand the principles and applications of copy turning lathe


5

4.1 Define copy turning and copy

turning lathe

4.2 Explain the operating principles of

copy turning lathe

4.3 Sketch and describe essential

feature of hydraulic coping slide

4.4 Justify the use of copy turning with

respect to other methods of machinery

e.g. on an automatic lathe

• Ask the students to define copy turning

and copy turning lathe

• Ask students to explain the operating

principles of copy turning lathe

• Ask the students to sketch and describe

essential feature of hydraulic coping slide

• Ask the students to justify the use of

copy turning with respect to other

methods of machinery e.g. on an

automatic lathe.

General Objective: 5.0 Know milling operations


6

5.1 Describe milling operation

5.2 Explain types of milling e.g. up cut,

down cut, gang and straddle milling

5.3 Classify milling machines

5.4 Describe at least five types milling

machines (at least one from each group

of the classifications)

5.5 Explain the use of dividing head,

rotary table and types of indexing and

how to carry out indexing using dividing

head, on a universal milling machine

5.6 Explain in sequential order how a

universal milling machine and dividing

head can be used for (a) helical milling

(b) can milling

• Ask the to describe milling operation

• Ask the students to explain types of

millinge.g up cut, down cut, gang and

straddle milling

• Ask the students to classify milling

machines

• Ask the students to describe at least

five types milling machines (at least one

from each group of the classifications)

• Ask the students to explain the use of

dividing head, rotary table and types of

indexing and how to carry out indexing

using dividing head, on a universal

milling machine

• Ask the students to explain in

sequential order how a universal milling

machine and dividing head can be used

for (a) helical milling (b) can milling

183



1hr/wk


General Objective: 6.0 Understand the construction and application of planing machines and plans

millers


7

6.1 Explain planing operation

6.2 Complete block diagrams of the

types and describe the essential

features of (a) planing machines (b)

Plano-millers

6.3 State the types of work suitable for

machines in 6.2 above

• Ask the student to explain planing

operation

• Ask the students to complete block

diagrams of the types and describe the

essential features of (a) planing

machines (b) Plano-millers

• Ask the students to state the types of

work suitable for machines in 6.2 above.

General Objective: 7.0 Know the types and applications of boring machines


8

7.1 Explain boring operations

7.2 Classify and list types of boring

machines

7.3 Compile block diagrams and explain

the operating principles of the: (a)

horizontal boring machine (b) vertical

boring machine (c) jig borer

7.4 Describe the operations carried out

in the horizontal boring machine

7.5 Calculate the coordinates for jig

boring operation

7.6 State the type of work suitable for

the machines in 7.2 above

7.7 Describe the operation of deep-hole

boring

• Ask the students to boring operations

• Ask the students to classify and list

types of boring machines

• Ask the students to compile block

diagrams and explain the operating

principles of the: (a) horizontal boring

machine (b) vertical boring machine (c)

jig borer


operations carried out in the horizontal

boring machine

• Ask the students to calculate

coordinates for jig boring operation

• Ask student to state the type of work

suitable for the machines in 7.2 above

• Ask student to describe operation of

deep-hole boring

184


Course: MACHINE TOOLS PROCESSES Course Code: MEC 422 Contact Hours: 1hr/wk


General Objective: 8.0 Understand the principles and application of screw thread production methods


10

8.1 List types of screw threads 8.2 Explain the principles of screw thread production on the capstan lathe by the following methods and collapsible tape (a) die heads (b) chasing (c) rolling 8.3 Describe the following methods of thread production (a) milling (including worm) (b) grinding (single rib and multi-rib wheel at the helix angle by thread in the processes to avoid interference) 8.4 Compare the relative merits by the processes in 8.2 and 8.3

• Ask students to list types of screw threads • Ask student to explain the principles of screw thread production on the capstan lathe by the following methods and collapsible tape (a) die heads (b) chasing (c) rolling • Ask student to describe the following methods of thread production (a) milling (including worm) (b) grinding (single rib and multi-rib wheel at the helix angle by thread in the processes to avoid interference) • Ask student to compare the relative merits by the processes in 8.2 and 8.3

General Objective: 9.0 Know principles and applications of gear cutting and gear shaping


11

9.1 List types of gear and methods of their cutting 9.2 Explain the principles of gear cutting as the universal milling machine and the limitations of the process to the production of accurate gears in quality 9.3 Describe the essential features of the following gear cutting machine (a) shaping (b) planning (c) hobing 9.4 Explain the operating principles of the machines outlined in 9.3 for cutting spur gears 9.5 Explain the range of other standard profiles which may be produced on the machines in 9.3 9.6 State the factors, which influence the choice of each process in 9.3.

• Ask students to list types of gear and methods of their cutting • Ask students to explain the principles of gear cutting as the universal milling machine and the limitations of the process to the production of accurate gears in quality • Ask students to describe the essential features of the following gear cutting machine (a) shaping (b) planning (c) hobing • Ask students to explain the operating principles of the machines outlined in 9.3 for cutting spur gears • Ask students to identify the range of other standard profiles which may be produced on the machines in 9.3 • Ask students to state the factors which influence the choice of each process in 9.3

9.7 Define gear finishing 9.8 Outline the following methods of gear finishing and give reasons why this process may be necessary

• Illustrate with diagrams and make notes.

185


Course: MACHINE TOOLS PROCESSES Course Code: MEC 422 Contact Hours: 1hr/wk


General Objective 10.0: Understand the principles and applications of broaching


13

10.1 Explain broaching 10.2 List and classify broaching machines 10.3 Explain the operating principles of the broaching machine 10.4 List and explain the features (nomenclature) of a standard broach 10.5 Enumerate the factors which influence broach design 10.6 Describe the technique of internal and surface broaching 10.7 Produce a labelled outline drawing or sketch showing essential features of a typical internal broach 10.8 Justify the use of the broaching process with respect to other machining processes

• Illustrate with diagrams and make notes • Assess the students

General Objective: 11.0 Understand the principles and application of EDM, ECM and Ultrasonic machining


14

11.1 Explain the principles of the following machines (a) EDM (b) ECM (c) Ultrasonic 11.2 List the materials and components which may be produced on the machines in 11.1 11.3 State the advantages and limitations of the processes in 11.1 as compared with conventional machining. 11.4 Compare the characteristics of the processes (or machines) in 11.1 in terms of (a) tool wear (b) work finish (c) metal removal rates

• Ask students to explain the principles of the following machines (a) EDM (b) ECM (c) Ultrasonic • Ask students to list the materials and components which may be produced on the machines in 11.1 • Ask students to state the advantages and limitations of the processes in 11.1 as compared with conventional machining. • Ask students to compare the characteristics of the processes (or machines) in 11.1 in terms of (a) tool wear (b) work finish (c) metal removal rates

186



1hr/wk


General Objective 12.0: Know the sources of moulding processes in common use


15

12.1 Describe, with the aid of sketches,

the principles of the following moulding

processes for plastic in common use:

(a) compression (b) transfer (c) injection


limitations of the processes in 12.1

12.3 State the sources of danger in

using the moulding processes in

12.4 List the forms of supply of plastic

raw materials

• Ask students to describe, with the aid of

sketches, the principles of the following

moulding processes for plastic in

common use: (a) compression (b)

transfer (c) injection


advantages and limitations of the

processes in 12.1

• Ask students to state the sources of

danger in using the moulding processes

in 12.1

• Ask students to list the forms of supply

of plastic raw materials

187

Machine Tools Processes


(OPTION)

Course: MACHINE TOOLS PROCESSES Course Code: MEM 222 Contact Hours: 2

hrs/wk


General Objective 1.0 Demonstrate skills in metal cutting Week


1 - 3

1.1 Carryout experiment involving Tool

Dynamometer, to measure the actual cutting

speed, force, etc.

7 Demonstrate for the students

to learn and ask them to

perform the activity.

• Tool Dynamometer

2.0 Demonstrate skills in the use of Lathe machines


4 - 6

2.1 Estimate the floor to floor time for the

production a simple component on capstan

lathe, using a selection of the different tooling.

2.2 Prepare an operation sheet (working

sheet) and the tool layout for the machining of

a typical engineering component, that will

involve turning, thread cutting, drilling,

chamfering, etc.

2.3 Carryout familiarization procedure on a

capstan and turret lathes in respect of setting

the tooling in the correct sequence to produce

a simple component.

2.4 Carryout cylindrical turning, drilling,

threading, parting, chamfering, etc. on a turret

machine using turret index head.



and ask the students to

carryout all the activities.


• Lathe machine and

its accessories


3.0 Demonstrate skills in the use of milling machine


7 - 9

3.1 Carryout familiarization procedure relating

to the milling of constant rise lobes on plate

cans

3.2 Carryout milling of hexagonal-headed

bolts.



learn and ask them to carry out

the activities.


• Milling machines

and its accessories


188


(OPTION)


hrs/wk


4.0 Demonstrate skills in planning operations



to the planning of an engineering component.

4.2 Carryout planning of an engineering

component with planning machine and plane

millers.



and ask them to perform all the

activities.

• Planning machines

• Plane - millers


5.0 Demonstrate skills in Boring operations


10 - 12


to the boring of an engineering component.

5.2 Perform boring operation of an

engineering component.



learn and ask them to carryout

the activities.


• Boring tools

• Practical guide

6.0 Demonstrate Skills in screw thread production



to screw thread production.

7.10 Perform scfrew thread cutting operation

in a given component.



and ask them to carryout the

activities.

• Lathe made and

accessories

• Threading tools


7.0 Demonstrate skills in Gear cutting and shaping


13 - 15


to Gear cutting and shaping

7.2 Carryout an exercise each involving spur

and helical gear cutting.

7.3 Demonstrate spur gear shaping on a gear

shaping machine.

7.4 Cut a helical gear by the hobbing method.



and ask them to perform all the

activities.


• Gear cutting and

shaping machine.

189


(OPTION)


hrs/wk


8.0 Demonstrate skills in broaching operations


8.1 Carryout familiarization procedures

relating to broaching operation in broaching

machine.

8.2 Design a simple broach from given data

8.3 Perform a broaching operation in a given

component.



and ask them to perform the

activities.


• Broaching machine

190

Press and Cutting Tools Design


Course: PRESS & CUTTING TOOLS DESIGN Course Code: MEM 423 Contact Hours:

(2,0,2)


General Objective: 1.0 Appreciate the basic principles of press tool design Week


1

1.1 Define the three different ways of

working sheet metal in press-shearing,

bending drawing.

1.2 Illustrate the progressive deformation

and the development of a shearing

structure during the shearing process.

1.3 Sketch typical load penetration graph

for shearing.

1.4 Illustrate the effect of clearance on

the piercing of a moderately doctile

metal.

1.5 Write an expression for the estimated

work required for shearing

1.6 Describe shear as applied to press

tools

• Ask the student to explain the three

different ways of working sheet metal

in press-shearing, bending drawing

• Ask the students to illustrate the

progressive deformation and the

development of a shear structure

during the shearing press.

• Ask the students to describe shear

as applied to press tools

Recommended

textbook

Chalkboard

Chalk

Duster

Lecture notes

Visual aid.

2

1.7 Calculate the amount of shear to be

incorporated on a die in order to reduce

the work required for shearing

1.8 Explain the concept of the

displacement of the neutral plane during

bending of a bar

1.9 Sketch a press tool for a simple

bending operation.

1.10 Illustrate the load conditions

required to produces a bend.

• Ask the students using an example

to calculate the amount of shear to be

incorporated on die to reduce the work

required for shearing


concept of the displacement of the

neutral plane during bending of a bar

• Ask student to sketch a press tool for

a simple bending operation.

• Ask students to illustrate the load

conditions required to produce a bend.

191


Course: PRESS & CUTTING TOOLS DESIGN Course Code: MEM 423 Contact Hours: (2,0,2)


General Objective: 1.0 Appreciate the basic principles of press tool design Week


1.11 Derive an expression for the bending load 1.12 Give an expression for the maximum punch load required to over-come the friction between the component and the die walls. 1.13 Explain the terms “set the bends”, “flatten (planish) the workpiece”, “bottom the press as used in bending” 1.14 Write an expression for the planishing force 1.15 Describe a feature of cold bending known as spring back 1.16 Outline ways of countering spring-back in bending 1.17 Show the basic features of a metal-drawing operationi.e. punch, blank diameter, cut, die. 1.18 Illustrate the deforming stresses in metal drawing. 1.19 Illustrate the tooling principles involved in drawing. 1.20 State the meaning of drawing ratio as applied to drawing. 1.21 State two properties, which principally determine how well a metal, may draw.

• Ask students to explain the terms a. set the bends b. flatten (planishing) the workpiece c. bottom the press as used in bending

• Ask the students to draw and show the basic features of a metal drawing operation including (a) punch (b) blank diameter (c) cut (d) die • Ask the students to illustrate the tooling principles involved in drawing. • Ask the students to explain the wearing of “drawing ratio and the two properties which principally determine how well a metal may draw. • Ask the students to draw and show the basic features of a metal drawing operation including (a) punch (b) black diameter (c) cut (d) die.

6

1.22 Develop an empirical formula for the punch load during drawing 1.23 Carry out calculations on drawing 1.24 Describe the following ways of deepening the cup after the first draw, redrawing, ironing, pressure sinking 1.25 Explain the need of lubrication in drawing.

• Ask students to carry out calculations on drawing exercise using the developed empirical formula • Ask the students to explain the following ways of deepening the cup after the first drawing

a. redrawing b. ironing c. pressure d. sinking

• Ask the students to explain principles of lubrication in drawing.

192



(2,0,2)


General Objective: 2.0 Understand the principles of cutting as applied to single-point cutting known

as oblique cutting


7 - 10

2.1 Illustrate the general case of cutting

known as orthogonal cutting.

2.2 Analysis he geometry of a single

point cutting tool

2.3 Illustrate the elements of a single

point tooli.e. flank, cutting edge, cutting

part, shank, face base, height, width.

2.4 Sketch the wedge-cutting action and

shear plane of a single-point cutting

edge.

2.5 Explain the following general cutting

terms feed, primary motion, work

surface, transient surface, machined

surface, depth of cut.

2.6 Describe the three types of a drip

formation,i.e. continuous, continuous

with built-up edge and discontinuous.

2.7 Outline the conditions that favour the

formation of each of the three types of

chip in 2.6

2.8 State the use of positive and

negative rake cutting taking into account

their limitations and advantages.

• Ask the students to illustrate via a

sketch the following: (a) feed (b)

primary motion (c) work surface (d)

transient surface (e) machined surface

(f) depth of cut

• Ask the students to outline the

conditions that favour the formation of

the three types of chip


advantages and the limitations of

positive and negative rake cutting.

193



(2,0,2)



as oblique cutting


11 - 12

2.9 Indicate on a sketch, the forces

acting on a single-point cutting tool

2.10 Sketch a single-component cutting

tool dynamometer

2.11 Describe the operation of the

dynamometer in 2.10

2.12 Illustrate the chip formation and

force systems as stipulated by

merchanti.e. to include forces at the

shear plane, and the cutting force and

thrust force

2.13 Draw merchant’s theory diagram

2.14 Determine using merchant’s theory

the cutting forces

2.15 Illustrate by a worked example,

merchant analysis of work done in

cutting.

2.16 Draw the vector diagram of

velocities of the cutting tool tip

2.17 Determine workdone in shearing

metal, against friction, and power

consumed during cutting

2.18 State the factors that affect the

cutting process

2.19 Explain how the seven factors in

2.19 affect the cutting process.

2.20 Define metal removal rate and

specific cutting pressure.

• Ask students to draw a sketch of a

single point cutting tool indicating the

forces acting on it.

• Ask the students to sketch a single

component cutting tool dynamometer


operation of the dynamometer in 2.10

• Ask the students to draw the vector

diagram of velocities at the cutting tool

tip of the exercise above and to also

determine the velocity components

• Ask the students to explain the seven

factors that affect the cutting process

and how.


following with respect to cutting

process

a. metal removal rate

b. specific cutting

pressure

194



(2,0,2)



as oblique cutting


13

2.21 Show the relationship between

specific cutting pressure with feels and

rake angle

2.22 Determine specific cutting pressure

given other parameters

2.23 Analyse tool life, tool life criteria,

tool failure and tool wear

2.24 Represent the relationship between

cutting speed and tool cutting speed and

tool life by the Taylor’s empirical Law

2.25 Describe the parameters in Taylor’s

Empirical law

2.26 Illustrate graphically Taylor’s tool life

law

2.27 Determine the constant in Taylor’s

tool life equation given the required

cutting test data

2.28 Carry out calculation on tool life


relationship between specific cutting

pressure with feeds and rake angle

• Ask the students by way of exercise

to determine the specific cutting when

given other parameters.


following:

• tool life (b) tool life criteria (c) tool

wear


parameters in Taylor’s empirical law

• Ask the students to illustrate Taylor’s

tool life law graphically using example

and also to carry out calculation on

tool life

195



(2,0,2)


General Objective: 3.0 Know the materials used for cutting tools and appreciate the factors affecting

their choice


14

3.1 List the five materials used for cutting

tools

3.2 State the four requirements of cutting

tools materials

3.3 List the factors affecting the choice of

a particular cutting tool material for

applications

3.4 Discuss the cutting tool materials in

3.1 taking into considerations such

factors as composition performance

advantages and disadvantages, further

development, specific characteristics,

their applications

3.5 Define the machinability a work

material

3.6 State two of the four variables that

can be used to indicate machinabilityi.e

tool life, finish, metal removal rate, power

required

3.7 Describe how the following

conditions of the material affect the

machinability, heat-treatment,

composition, microstructures inclusions,

and hardness, aid toughness.

3.8 Describe the machinability ratings

when used to indicate machinability

• Ask the students to explain the four

requirements of cutting tools materials.

• Ask the students describe any four

materials used for cutting tools.


factors that affect the choice of a

particular cutting tool for a particular

application.

• Ask the students to explain two of the

variable that can be used to indicate

machinability

• Ask the students to explain how heat

treatment, micro structures, industrial,

hardness and toughness of material

affect their machinability

196



(2,0,2)


General Objective: 4.0 Understand the general principles of tool design


15

4.1 Explain the general principles of tool

design involving such consideration as

strength heat dissipation and geometry

4.2 Describe motion study as applied to

tool design

4.3 Analyse the economics of tool design

such as tooling cost to quantity and rate

of production

• Ask students to outline the general

principles of tool design

• Ask the students to explain motion

study as applied in tool design


(OPTION)


2-0-2




1 - 7

1.1 Demonstrate the progressive

deformation and development of a shearing

structure during shearing process.

1.2 Demonstrate the effect of clearance on

the piercing of a moderately ductile metal.

1.3 Demonstrate the load conditions

required to produce a band.

1.4 Identify the basic features of metal

draining operationi.e. punch black diameter,

cut, die.

1.5 Demonstrate the deforming stresses in

metal drawing.

1.6 Identify the tooling principles involved in

drawing.





• Practical

guide.

197


(OPTION)


2-0-2


2.0 Demonstrate skills in Oblique cutting

8 - 10

2.1 Demonstrate the general case of cutting

known as orthozonal cutting.

2.2 Identify the elements of a single point

tooli.e flank, cutting edge, cutting part,

shank, face, base, height, width.

2.3 Demonstrate the chip formation and

force systems as stipulated by merchant.



practise the activities.


• Single point

tool

• Lathe

3.0 Demonstrate skills in tool design

11-15

3.1 Use the general principles of tool design

involving such consideration as strength,

heat dissipation and geometry.

3.4 Demonstrate motion study as applied to

tool design

3.5 .Demonstrate the economics of tool

design such as tooling cost to quantity and

rase of production.

3.6 Carryout the design consideration and

analysis of any cutting tool.


the students to learn and ask than to

carryout the activities.


• Design guide.

198

Environmental Engineering


(OPTION)

COURSE: ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING Course Code: MEC 411 Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)

Course Specific: Theoretical Content

General Objective: Understand the various types of Environmental pollution and their effects on the

environment Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Resources

1-2

1.1 Define pollution in general and

environmental

1.2 Pollution in particular

1.2 Define pollutants and state relationship

between pollution and pollutants

1.3 Describe what constitute environmental

pollution

1.4 State pollution levels expected in various

work environments and show how they can

be measured with reference to 1.3 above

• Ask the students to explain pollution in general and environmental pollution in particular • Ask the student to differentiate between pollution and pollutants • Ask students to analyse what constitute environmental pollution • Ask the student to state acceptable pollution level in various work environment and carry out measurement

• Environmental

control apparatus

• Recommended

textbooks

• Lecture notes

• Chalk, chalkbioard,

• Duster

• Visual aids.

1.5 State the effects of pollutants on plants,

human beings, animals and materials

1.6 Explain the physiological implication of

pollution in work environment

• Ask the students to state the effect of pollutants on plants, human beings, animals and materials • Ask the students to explain the physiological and psychological implication of pollution in work environment

General Objective 2.0: Understand various types of pollution


2.2 Describe chemical, thermal, radioactive

and noise pollution

2.3 Explain the social implications of 2.2

above

2.4 Explain the meaning of “hazardous waste

2.5 State sources of hazardous wastes

2.6 List hazardous wastes (radioactive,

chemical, biological, Flammable etc)


social implications of the various

types of pollution


meaning of hazardous waste

• Ask the students to enumerate

sources of hazardous wasted as

well as list the different types.

• Solid waste

compactor

199


(OPTION)


(1,1,0)


General Objective: 3.0 Know the generation of liquid wastes


3

3.1 Describe sources and types of liquid

waste

3.2 Explain the composition of liquid and

solid wastes

3.1 Describe the generation rate of liquid and

solid wastes

3.2 Classify modes of measurement of 3.3

e.g. (i) measure of Volume/flow rate (ii)

Statistical analysis generation rate

• Ask the students to state

sources and types of liquid

Wastes.

• Ask the students to discuss

generation rate, different ways

of measuring as well as factors

affecting liquid waste

• Ask the students to discuss on

site handling of liquid and solid

wastes for residential and

commercial premises.

General Objective 4.0: Understand the methods of onsite handling storage and processing of liquid

and solid waste


4

4.1 Explain public health and aesthetics 4.2 Describe the method of onsite handling for (i) Residential Premises (ii) commercial premises 4.3 Describe the methods of onsite processing,e.g. grinding, serving Compaction, shredding and composting, chemical and biological.


method of storage

• Discussion site processing

methods e.g. grinding shedding

General Objective 5.0: Know the method of solid and liquid waste collection


5

5.1 Describe collection services

5.2 Describe collection systems, equipment

and labour requirement

5.3 List collection systems, e.g., hauled

container system and stationary collection

systems

5.4 Analyse collection systems

5.5 Determine collection routes


what is a collection service.

• Ask the students to list

collection systems

• Ask the student to analyse

collection systems and

collection routes

• Standard collection

BIN (WASCO)

200


(OPTION)


(1,1,0)


General Objective 6.0: Understand the methods of transfer and transport of solid and liquid wastes


6.1 Explain the need for transfer stations

6.2 Describe transfer stations

6.3 Describe transport means and methods

6.4 Determine the location of transfer

stations


need for transfer operations

• Ask the students to discuss

transfer stations and location of

transfer station

• \Dust Bin Truck

Incinerator

General Objective 7.0: Understand the methods and equipment for solid and liquid waste processing


6-7

7.1 State purpose of processing

7.2 Describe the methods of processing

a. mechanical volume

reduction(ii) chemical volume

reduction

b. mechanical size

reduction(iv) component

separation

• Ask the students the reason for

solid and liquid waste

processing

• Analyses different methods of

processing

• Discuss with the student s

method of drying and watering

General Objective: 8.0 Understand the source and utilization of various forms of energy form the

waste materials


9-13

8.1 Review the principles of conservation of

energy

8.2 List the forms of energy available in

various forms of pollutants such as in solid

waste, air, etc.

8.3 Explain the process of energy conversion

in 9.2

8.4 Identify materials that can be re-cycled,

e.g., waste paper, waste cloth, gully water,

etc.

8.5 Describe land reclamation process

• Discuss principle of

conservation of energy

• Ask the students forms of

energy in various forms of

pollutants

• Explain materials that can be

re-cycled


processing and recovery system

PowerPoint projector

201


(OPTION)


(1,1,0)


General Objective: 8.0 Understand the source and utilization of various forms of energy form the

waste materials


8.6 Describe the processing and recovery

systems

8.7 Draw the process flow sheet

8.8 Explain the process of incineration with

heat recovery

8.9 Define and describe pyrolysis and

incineration pyrolysis in energy conversion

• Discuss with student process

flow sheet and explain process

of incineration with heat

recovery

General Objective 9.0: Understand the steps in implementing Environmental Standards


14-15

9.1 Benefits of environmental management:

Cost, Marketing

Customer, Employees, Local Community.

9.2 Environmental Review: Flow process

diagrams, mass balance, quantifying

complaints, summating disposal cost,

assessing significance.

9.3 Environmental matrix scoring: Normal

and other operations, contingency planning.

• Ask students to design

overview of requirements under

ISO headings for a small local

company.

Assess.

9.4 Environmental policy: Management

responsibility, objectives and targets,

External Communication, Audit period.

9.5 ISO 14,000 Certification: Management,

Policy, Organisation, Effects, objectives and

targets, training programme, procedure

manual, records, Audits, Reviews

202

Material Handling


(OPTION)

Course: MATERIAL HANDLING Course Code: MEM 424 Contact

Hours: (1,1,0)


General Objective: 1.0 Understand reasons for proper material handling Week


1 - 2

1.1 Define material handling

1.2 Explain the concept of material handling

1.3 List objective of material handling and

relate them to cost, labour, work-in-progress,

production control, damages, etc

1.4 Explain the three basic factors which

influence the handling of any material

1.5 Explain the essential differences between

production handling (dynamism or mechanical)

and warehouse handling (staticism)

1.6 Describe situations where material handling

is needed (workplace or between workplace;

departmentale.t.c through the factory or

warehouse and inter-Organisation-receipt of

goods from suppliers, delivery to customers.

1.7 Out line the relationship between the

various functions such as information handling

function, stock control, order processing, etc

involved in material handling


• List objectives of material handling

• State the three basic factors which

influence the handling of any material

• Explain the essential differences

between production handling and

warehouse handling

• Describe situation where material

handling is needed

• Outline relationship between

various functions such as information

handling, stock control, order

processing involved in material

handling

203


(OPTION)


Hours: (1,1,0)


General Objective 2.0: Understand the various material handling methods and equipment


3 - 4

2.1 List and explain material handling methods

such as (i) serial picking, parallel picking, FIFO

and LIFO

2.2.List the merits and demerits of the methods

of handling in 2.1

2.3 Classify all types of material handling

equipment into overhead equipment, conveyor

or trucks.

2.3 Determine factors affecting selection of

equipment listed in 2.3

2.4 Describe out least five storage systems

such bin, shelf, pallet, bar rock, flat support

system, adjustable rack, etc.

2.5 Explain the use of demontable bodies in

material handling


• List various materials handling

equipment

• Explain the terms FIFO and LIFO

• State merits and demerits of

methods of handling in 2.1

• Classify all types of material

handling into overhead equipment,

conveyor or trucks.

• State factors affecting selection of

equipment listed in 2.3


• Describe five storage systems as

well as explain the use of

demonstrate bodies in material

handling

General Objective: 3.0 Understand the packing technique and technologies in total material handling


5 - 6

3.1 Explain packaging technique

3.2 Define and describe string wrapping

cushioning, and secondary packaging.

3.3 Describe the essential features of

automated Warehousing.

3.4 Outline the relationship between plant

layout and material handling in automation

3.5 Explain a simple material handling system

design

• Ask the students to: • Explain packing techniques and technologies in total material handling • Define and describe string wrapping, cushioning, and secondary packaging. • Ask the students to: - • Describe essential features of automated ware-housing • Outline the relationship between plant layout and material handling in automation • Explain a simple material handling system design.

204


(OPTION)


Hours: (1,1,0)


General Objective: 4.0 Understand the unit load principle and turning circle calculation and their

usefulness in material handling


7 - 8

4.1 Define and explain unit load principle and

turning circle calculation

4.2 Relate the unit load principle to

Containerisation

4.3 Explain the various means such as weight,

vehicle capacity, turning moment, types of

body, etc, vehicle transport related to the

material handling


• Define unit load principle and

Calculate the turning circle in material

handling

• 2. Relate the unit load principle to

containerisation

• Ask the students to

• Explain various means such as

weight, vehicle, capacity, turning

moments types of body, open or

close body, etc vehicle transport

related to material handling.

• How the turning circle calculation is

used to solve loading problems

associated with rigid body and

articulated body vehicles up to 48

footer

205


(OPTION)


Hours: (1,1,0)


General Objective: 5.0 Know the causes and ways of preventing common injuries associated with

Manual handling


10- 12

5.1 State the types of injuries that are

associated with manual handling

5.2 State the general guidelines that can be

given to those who handle materials manually.

5.3 Explain the correct application of the six

basic principles essential for safe method of

manual handling of load

5.4 Outline the important of Team lifting and

carrying

5.5 Explain the methods of handling


• 1. State courses and ways of

preventing common

• injuries associated with Manual

handling

• State the general guidelines for

those who handle Materials

manually.

• Explain the correct application of

the six basic principles of the six

basic principles essential for safe

method Manual handling of loads.

• Ask the students to: -

• Outline the important of team lifting

and carrying

• Explain methods of handling

specific shapes

General Objective: 6.0 Understand the basic principle of First Aid.


13

6.1 State the various types of accessories for

manual handling

6.2 Describe simple methods of First Aid.

6.3 Explain and apply the techniques of

treating minor injuries; e.g. fresh wound, simple

Fracture, burns electric shock, etc.

6.4 Explain and apply the technique of

application of artificial respiration

• State the various types of

accessories for manual handling


• State the basic principles of First

Aid

• Describe simple method of First Aid

• Explain and apply the techniques of

treating minor injuries e.g. Fresh

wound, simple fracture, burns, etc

• Explain and apply the technique of

application Of artificial respiration

First Aid Kit

First Aid Kit

206


(OPTION)


Hours: (1,1,0)


General Objective 7.0: Understand the safety and effective maintenance of material handling

equipment


14

7.1 Outline the safety and effective

maintenance of materials handling equipment

7.2 Identify simple causes of equipment

breakdown and describe their methods of

repair.

7.3 Explain materials handling code of practice


• Outline the safety effective

maintenance of materials handling

equipment

• State simple causes of equipment

breakdown and describe their

methods of repair

• Explain materials handling code of

practices

General Objective 8.0: Understand the various cost involved in Material handling.


15

8.1 List various cost centres in material

handling

8.2 Establish material handling costs

8.3 Relate costs to stock control policy

8.4 Relate cost to order of processing

(information handling, documentation cost, etc)

• Ask the students to: -

• List various cost centres in material

handling

• Establish material handling costs.

• Ask the students to relate costs to

stock control policy and to order of

processing information handling,

documentation cost,

• Etc.

207

Jigs, Fixture and Tool Design

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (MANUFACTURING

(OPTION))

COURSE: JIGS, FIXTURE DESIGN Course Code MEM425 Contact Hours:

(2,0,2)


General Objective 1.0: Know the basic principles of jigs and fixtures Week


1 - 5

1.1 State the purpose and application of

jigs and fixtures

1.2 Differentiate between jigs and fixtures

1.3 State the basic principles of location

with reference to the six degrees of

freedom.

1.4 List the main elements of design of jig

and fixture

1.5 Explain the method of Location

utilizing the surface of the component e.g.

flat, external, cylindrical, and bore

1.6 Describe the following specific

treatment methods and device, pin and

button, rest pad, and plates, nest or cavity

location stop screws

• Ask the students to explain the purpose and application of jigs and fixtures. • Ask the students to differentiate between jigs and fixtures. • Ask the students to explain the basic principles of location with reference to the six degrees of freedom. • Ask students to list the main elements of design of jig and fixture. • Ask students to explain the method of location utilizing the surface of the component e.g. flat, external etc. • Ask students to describe the various locating methods and device e.g. pin and button rest pad, location screws rest etc..

• Blackboard

ruler (lm)

• Blackboard

compass

• Adjustable

square

• A set of square

(45o 60o)

• Duster

• Chalk

General Objective 2.0: Understand the Operation of jigs


6 - 9

2.1 List the basic components of a jig.

2.2 State the advantages of using jigs

2.3 Describe the operation of a typical jig

• Ask the students to list the basic

component of a jig.


advantages of using jigs


operations of a typical jig.

10 - 11

2.4 Describe the following methods of jig

construction: build-up construction,

fabricated and cast construction


between the method of build-up,

construction and fabricated and cast

construction of jig.

• Ask the student to describe the

methods in 2.4 above.

208

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (MANUFACTURING

(OPTION))

COURSE: JIGS, FIXTURE DESIGN Course Code MEM425 Contact Hours:

(2,0,2)


General Objective 2.0: Understand the Operation of jigs


• Design jigs for the manufacture of

simple components

• Ask students to design jigs for the

manufacture. Four simple components

one for each week.

General Objective 3.0: Understand the Operation of Fixtures


12 - 15

3.1 List the basic component parts of

fixtures.

3.2 Describe the following types of

fixtures: vice and fixtures for milling,

boring, broaching, grinding and welding

• Ask the students to list the basic

components parts of fixtures.

• Ask the students the following types

of fixtures: vice and fixtures for milling,

boring, broaching, grinding and

welding.

3.3 Design fixtures for locating and

damping simple components

• Ask the students to design fixtures for

locating and damping four simple

components one per week.

209

Machine Assembly Installation & Commissioning


COURSE: MACHINE ASSEMBLY

INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING COURSE CODE: MEM 426

CONTACT HRS:

2hrs/wk

COURSE SPECIFIC: THEORETICAL CONTENT

General Objective: 1.0 Know the different types of devices for machine Installation Week


1

1.1 Describe different types of spirit

levels

1.2 Describe the use of theodilite

and/or autocollimator in obtaining

levels of a surface

1.3 Describe shims, levelling plates

and adjustable levelling pads and

explain their uses

1.4 Describe the use of wedges

• Discuss the different types of spirit levels

• Distinguish the difference between

theodilite and autocollimator

• Describe their uses: shims, levelling

plates, adjustable levelling pads and to

explain their uses


a. Explain levelling

wedges

b. describe their uses

• Theodilite

Autocollimator

Optical square block

• Leveling wedges

adjustable levelling

pods

General Objective 2.0: Know how to prepare foundations for machines from foundation drawing


2

2.1 Interpret foundation plan and

prepare template from it.

2.2 Explain how to locate foundation

bolts with and without the template

2.3 Describe the different types of

foundation bolts and their uses

2.4 Describe the different methods

of securing foundation bolts e.g.

(raw bolts, flush ankles etc)

2.5 Explain the need to isolate

foundation with the use of materials

such as cork, etc.

• Describe the following: (a) Interpretation

of foundation plan drawing (b) preparation

of template from the foundation plan

drawing.

• Discuss the following: (a) location of

foundation bolts using the template (b)

location of foundation bolts without using

the template

• (a) describe the different types of

foundation bolts (b) state their uses

• Describe the different methods of

securing foundation bolts

• Discuss and illustrate (a) the need for

isolation of some machine foundations (b)

list some materials needed for machine

foundation isolation

210




CONTACT HRS:

2hrs/wk


General Objective 2.0: Know how to prepare foundations for machines from foundation drawing


3

2.6 Explain the construction of form-

work for foundation concrete

2.7 Explain the method of pouring

foundation concrete and use of

vibrators

• Explain the following: (a) the need for

form-work of machine foundation (b) the

construction of form-work for machine

foundation (c) the materials, required for

the construction of the concrete form work

• Explain (a) the procedure of pouring

foundation concrete (b) use of rammers

and mechanical vibrators

General Objective 3.0: Know installation and commissioning of machines


4

3.1 Explain material handling of a

machine tool during installation

3.2 Explain the importance of the

following operations before

installation: (a) unpacking (b)

inspection (c) breakage/damage

reports

3.3 Explain the need of removing

preventive coatings and rust

3.4 Describe methods of levelling a

machine tool e.g. a lathe, using

installation devices in 1.0

3.5 Illustrate the methods in 3.4 with

sketches

3.6 Define machine alignment

• Discuss what materials entails during

installation

• List out the various material handling

equipment and the accessories required

• Discuss the importance of unpacking,

inspection and breakage, damage report

• State the necessary action to be taken

when variation are found in (b) or when

breakage/damage occur.

• Explain why preventive coatings and rust

need to be removed.

• Ask the students to sketch the levelling

methods

• Define alignment and state the

importance in machine building

• Spirit levels parallel

strips levelling

wedges levelling

plates/pads

211




CONTACT HRS:

2hrs/wk


General Objective 3.0: Know installation and commissioning of machines


5

3.7 Explain methods of aligning

machine tool components

3.8 Explain gout and describe the

method of gouting a machine tool

(e.g. lathe or drilling machine)

3.9 Describe methods of find

levelling and alignment on 3.4 and

3.9

3.10 Explain necessary

preparations for commissioning e.g.

(a) cleaning of machine tool (b)

supply of necessary lubricants (c)

preparing test piece and test report

format (d) ensuring correct electrical

connections

3.11 Explain idle running of machine

tool and the preparation of no-load -

test report

3.12 Explain load-test using work

piece and the preparation of load-

test report

• Discuss the methods of aligning a typical

compound of machine tool e.g. cross slide

of milling machine etc.

• Explain the method of gouting a lathe or

drilling machine

• State the precaution to be taken during

and after gouting in other to maintain the

level of the machine.

• Understand final levelling and alignment

on machine tools and state the necessary

precaution

• Discuss the following in preparation for

commissioning of machine tools (a)

proper cleaning of the machine

specifically the guide ways appropriate (b)

lubricants required for the various gear

boxes slide ways and stuffing boxes (c)

Format for test report and test piece

preparation (d) correct electrical

connection.

• Explain: (a) idle running of machine tools

(b) No-load-test report.

• Discuss load-test and load-test report;

compare test results with standard

specific in the test chart of the machine in

all cases.

6 - 7

3.13 Explain with illustration the

equipment acceptance certificate

• Discuss and illustrate the equipment

acceptance certificate.

• State the importance of equipment

acceptance of equipment certificate

212


COURSE: MACHINE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING

COURSE CODE: MEM 426 CONTACT HRS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 4.0: Appreciate maintenance systems, their planning and scheduling


8-9

4.1 Define maintenance 4.2 Name and describe the different types of maintenance strategies e.g. preventive, planned, breakdown, shut down, running and contract. 4.3 Explain the roles of each of the maintenance systems in 4.2 4.4 Explain the importance of maintenance in industries and the benefit derived from a successful maintenance system 4.5 Define maintenance planning and scheduling 4.6 Explain the role of forecasting in maintenance planning 4.7 Explain the scheduling of planned and preventive maintenance

• Define maintenance • Describe the various maintenance strategies in 4.2 and state the advantages of each • Discuss the roles of each of the maintenance systems in 4.2 • Explain the following (a) importance of maintenance in industries (b) benefits derived from a successful maintenance system. • Differentiate between: maintenance planning and scheduling and define each of them. • Explain the role of forecasting in maintenance planning • Discuss the scheduling of planned and preventive maintenance • What are the advantages to be gained in scheduling planned and preventive maintenance?

General Objective 5.0: Know functions of maintenance stores and material control


10-11

5.1 Explain the functions of maintenance stores 5.2 Classify machine spare-parts and consumables 5.3 Explain the objective of material control documentation 5.4 Explain the problems relating to the operation of maintenance stores (e.g. organizational and procedure problems) 5.5 Define stock control and the use of Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)

• Explain the functions of maintenance stores • Discuss the classification of machine spare-parts and consumables • Explain the objectives of the following: (a) material control (b) material documentation in a machine spare-parts maintenance store. • Discuss the problems relating to operation of maintenance stores in: (a) organizational (b) procedural • Define the formulae for the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)

213




CONTACT HRS:

2hrs/wk


General Objective 6.0: Understand the importance of maintenance reports and records


12

6.1 State guidelines for

maintenance reporting

6.2 Develop format for reporting and

evaluating maintenance work

6.3 State and analyse equipment

records for periodic replacement of

parts and lubrications

• State guidelines for maintenance

reporting

• Guidelines should reflect the type of

maintenance strategy been operated in a

particular system

• State the benefits derived from the

analysis of records from equipment

manuals with respect to parts and

lubricants replacement.

General Objective 7.0: Machine Assembling and Dismantling techniques


14

7.1 State types of assembly lines

(e.g. non-mechanized (manual,

mechanized, semi-automatic and

automatic assembly lines

7.2 Explain the assembly lines in

7.1

7.3 Draw typical assembly lines to

illustrate the inter-relationship

between assembly and work

stations

7.4 Explain assembly flow-chart for

a typical machine

7.5 List and describe simple

assembly toolse.g extractor

screw driver, mallet, hydraulic or

arbor press

15

Revision Review the course appropriately, laying

more emphasis in areas of weakness of

the students

214


COURSE: MACHINE ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION AND COMISSIONING

COURSE CODE: MEM 426 CONTACT HRS: 2hr/wk

COURSE SPECIFIC: PRACTICAL

General Objective 1.0: Demonstrate the different types of devices for machine installation Week


1

1.3 Identify shims, levelling plates and adjustable levelling pads and explain their uses. 1.4 Demonstrate the use of wedges 1.2 Demonstrate methods of levelling a machine tool e.g. a lathe, using installation devices in 1.0

• Ask the students to identify shims, levelling plates and adjustable levelling plates. Discuss their uses in workshop

• Spirit level test mandrels dial gauges parallel strips levelling wedges Hammer• Spirit level piller drilling machine levelling wedges

5

1.3 Carry out alignment tools on already existing machine tool making use of devices in 1.0 1.4 Perform the commissioning of a simple machine tool, (e.g. a drilling machine)

• Show wedges and demonstrate the levelling of a lathe using the devices in 1.0

6

• Demonstrate the levelling of a lathe using the devices in 1.0, consideration should be given to the following: (a) test chart specific of convexity (b) stability of the machine after fine adjustment of levelling screws.

7

• Demonstrate alignment tests on existing lathe and note the following: (a) sequence of alignment testing (b) standard test chart for the machine (c) accuracy of test measuring instruments • Ask the students to perform the installation and commissioning of a pillar drilling machine

1.5 Explain load test using workpiece and the preparation of load-test chart

• Demonstrate load-test on machine e.g. lathe

• Lathe cutting tools micrometer

215




CONTACT HRS:

2hrs/wk


General Objective 2.0: Demonstrate skills in machine assembling and dismantling


8 - 10

2.1 Dismantle a typical

machine in the workshop

2.2 Clean and identify the

components of the machine

2.3 Check the components

in 7.7 above for dimensional

accuracy

2.4 Re-assemble the

machine and check parts in

position

2.5 Test run the re-

assembled machine

• Demonstrate/ask students to dismantle the

machine and identify the components

• Guide students in correct use of

instruments

• Fellow assemble procedure of (a) group

assembly (b) final assembly

• Tool box complete with

set spanners

• Micrometer venier

caliper, Test manuals,

parallel strips,

thermometer spirit levels

levelling wedges

216

Applied Thermodynamics

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - PLANT ENGINEERING

(OPTION)

COURSE: APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS COURSE CODE: MEP 321 CONTACT HOURS:

2hrs/wk


General Objective 1.0: Know the equations governing the flow and non-flow processes in common

engineering devices Week


1

1.1 State the steady flow energy equation as it

applies to (a) turbine (b) compressors (c)

nozzles and diffusers (d) throttling process (e)

boilers, condensers, evaporators and other

heat transfer equipment

1.2 Explain the assumption made in the

derivation of the equation in 1.1 above

• Ask students to apply steady

flow energy equation to the

devices mentioned

• Ask students to measure exit

velocities using different nozzle

sizes

• Lecture notes

• Recommended

textbooks

• Chalk,

• Chalkboard

• Dusters.

2

1.3 State the non-flow energy equation for (a)

Constant volume (b) constant pressure (c)

isothermal process (PV = constant) of a perfect

gas (d) polytropic process (PVn = constant)

• Ask students to explain all the

assumptions made

• Ask students to state the non-

flow energy equation for the

processes.

General Objective: 2.0 Understand the common-thermodynamic vapour power cycles


3

2.1 Describe the essential processes in a

carnot cycle

2.2 Define specific steam consumption, work

ratio and the cycle efficiency

2.3 Explain the practical difficulties in

employing the carnot cycle for a steam power

plant

2.4 Explain the Rankine cycle

2.5 Explain the advantages of Rankine cycle

over carnot cycle


essential processes in a carnot

cycle

• Ask students to define specific

steam consumption, work ratio

and the cycle efficiency.

• Boilers steam

plant.

4

2.6 Analyse Rankine cycle with super heat re-

heat regeneration, economizer and air pre-

heater


practical difficulties in

employing the Carnot cycle for

a steam power plant

217


(OPTION)


2hrs/wk


General Objective: 2.0 Understand the common-thermodynamic vapour power cycles


5

• Ask students to Solve

problems related to carnot cycle


Rankine cycle


advantages of Rankine cycle

over carnot cycle

• Ask students to analyst

Rankine cycle

• Ask students to solve

problems related to Rankine

cycle

• Carry out experiments on

steam power plant

General Objective: 3.0 Understand the Common thermodynamic gas power cycles


6

3.1 Describe the Brayton/Joule cycle

3.2 Analyse the cycle in 3.1 above

3.3 Analyse the cycle in 3.1 above with inter-

cooling and pre-heating


Brayton/Joule cycle

• Ask students to analyse the

Brayton/Joule cycle

7

3.4 Describe Otto, Diesel, Dual and stirling and

Atkinson cycles

3.5 Analyse cycles in 3.4 above

3.6 Explain mean effective pressure

compression ratio and cut-off ratio

• Ask students to analyse the

cycle in 3.1 above with inter-

cooling and pre-heating

• Ask students to explain Otto,

Diesel, Dual and stirling and

Atkinson cycles

218

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - PLANT ENGINEERING (OPTION)

COURSE: APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS COURSE CODE: MEP 321 CONTACT HOURS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective: 3.0 Understand the Common thermodynamic gas power cycles


8

• Ask students to analyse Otto Diesel, Dual and stirling and Atkinson cycles • Ask students to explain mean effective pressure, compression ratio and cut-off ratio • Ask students to solve related problems • Determine experimentally the cycle efficiencies of Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles. • Assess

General Objective 4.0: Understand various types of compressors


9

4.1 Explain advantages and disadvantages of reciprocating and rotary compressors 4.2 Explain delivery pressures 4.3 Explain the need for and effect of clearance Volume in construction of compressor 4.4 Explain staging of compressors 4.5 Explain inter-cooling, after-cooling and optimum inter-stage pressures

• Ask students to explain advantages and disadvantages of reciprocating and rotary compressors • Ask students to explain delivery pressures • Ask students to explain the need for and effect of clearance

• Rotary compressor • Axial compressor • Reciprocating Compressor

10

4.6 Explain efficiencies (e.g. isothermal, isentropic)

• Ask students to explain staging of compressors • Ask the students to explain inter-cooling after-cooling and optimum inter-stage pressures • Ask students to explain efficiencies • Solve problems related to isothermal and Isentropic efficiencies • Assess

219


(OPTION)


2hrs/wk


General Objective 5.0: Understand gas turbine engines


11

5.1 Analyse gas turbine cycle with or without

reheat

5.2 Calculate parameters such as thermal

5.3 Explain the differences in the design of gas

turbines for air craft and industrial applications

5.4 Describe application of gas, turbine cycles

for aircraft propulsion ramjet, turbojet, turbofan

and turboprop engines

5.5 Enumerate the limitations of ideal gas

turbine cycle

5.6 Explain with the aid sketches the gas

turbine

5.7 Compare and contrast gas turbine engine

with the reciprocating internal combustion

engines

• Ask students to analyse gas

turbine cycle with or without

reheat

• Ask students to solve

problems related to gas turbine

• Calculate parameters such as

thermal efficiency


differences in the design of gas

turbines for air craft and

industrial applications


various applications of gas

turbines

• Ask students to enumerate the

limitations of ideal gas turbine

cycle


the aid of sketches the gas

turbine engine

• Ask students to compare and

contrast gas turbine engine with

the reciprocating internal

combustion engines

• Assess

220


(OPTION)


2hrs/wk


General Objective 6.0: Know the volumetric efficiency in relation to 4-stroke engine and solve related

problems of air capacity, power etc


14-15

6.1 Define volumetric efficiency and express it

algebraically

6.2 Explain the importance of (a) inlet density

(b) the mach index in relation to volumetric

efficiency

6.3 Explain factors influencing the volumetric

efficiency

6.4 Describe the methods for determining

volumetric efficiency

• Ask students to define

volumetric efficiency and

express it algebraically


importance of the parameters

listed

• Ask students to explain factors

influencing the volumetric

efficiency


methods for determining

volumetric efficiency

• Ask students to solve related

problems

• Prepare students for

examination by revising and

solving tutorial problems

• Assess

221


(OPTION)

COURSE: APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS

COURSE CODE: MEP 321

CONTACT HOURS

2hrs/wk

COURSE SPECIFICATION: PRACTICAL CONTENTS

General Objective: Identify flow and non-flow devices and vapour power cycles Week


1 - 7

1.1 Identify the following

(a) Turbine

(b) Compressors,

(c) Nozzles and

diffusers,

(d) Throtting process,

(e) Boilers, condensers,

evaporators.

1.2 Determine, experimentally, steam

consumption, work ratio and cycle

efficiency of steam plant.

1.3 Determine experimentally the cycle

efficiencies of Otto, Diesel and Dual

cycles.

1.4 Carryout experiments on steam plant.





• Compressors

• Diffusers,

• Boilers,

• Turbine, etc.

2.0 Determine power out from flow devices


8 - 15

2.1 Carryout experiments on

compressors to determine power output

of a compressor


power output of gas turbine

2.3 Determine experimentally fuel

consumption, power output on engine

test bed



then to carryout the activities.


• Compressors

• Gas turbine

• Engine test bed with

petrol and diesel

engines.

222

Safety


(OPTION)

COURSE: SAFETY COURSE CODE: MEP 322 CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 1.0: Understand the importance of safety in industry. Week


1 - 2

1.1 Define industrial safety

1.2 Outline the importance of accident

prevention in industry

1.3 Explain the effect of fire and other

industrial accidents on the major goal

of the company which is profit

maximization

1.4 Point out the role of shareholders,

managers, supervisors and other

workers in contributing towards

accident prevention in industry

• Ask students to define industrial safety.


importance of accident prevention in

industry.

• Ask the students to explain the effect of

fire and other industrial accidents on the

major goal of the company which is profit

maximization

• Ask the students to point out the role of

shareholders, mangers, supervisors and

other workers in contributing towards

accident prevention in industry.

• recommended

textbooks

• chalk

• chalboard

• lecture notes.

223


(OPTION)


HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 2.0: Know the causes and ways of preventing industrial accidents not caused by

fire


3 - 4

2.1 Outline the various factors that

undermine industrial safety

2.2 Explain the types of accidents that

can occur while working with machinery

and ways of preventing them.

2.3 Give examples of the types of

accidents that can occur during welding

operations and the precautions to be

taking against them.

2.4 Explain the methods of protection

against radiation.

2.5 State the types of accidents that

are associated with storage and

handling of chemicals and ways of

preventing them.

2.6 Outline hazards of compressed air.

2.7 Outline the general principles vital

to safety programme and general

measures of accident prevention.

2.8 Explain various approaches to

reporting and investigating industrial

accidents.

2.9 Describe the various ways of

communicating the safety message to

the people concerned

2.10 Explain the types of medical aid

given to accident victims.

• Ask the students to outline the various

factors undermine industrial safety.

• Ask the student to explain the types of

accidents that can occur while working

with machinery and ways of preventing

them.

• Ask the students to give examples of

the types of accidents that can occur

during welding operations and the

precautions to be taking against them.


protections against radiation

• Ask the students to state the types of

accidents that are associated with

storage and handling of chemicals and

ways of preventing them.

• Ask the students to outline hazards of

compressed air

• Ask the students to outline the general

principles vital to safety programmes and

general measures of accidents

prevention.

• Ask students to explain various

approaches to reporting and

investigating industrial accidents.


various ways of communicating the

safety message to the people

concerned.

• Ask the students to explain the types of

medical aid given to accident victims

224


COURSE: SAFETY COURSE CODE: MEP 322 CONTACT HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 3.0: Appreciate what is involved in safety inspection


5 - 7

3.1 Define the term safety inspection. 3.2 Explain the term (a) Safety audits (b) Formal inspection (c) hazard spitting (d) Specific inspection and identify the relationship between them and the appropriate places where they apply. 3.3 State who should inspect for appropriate cases in 3.2 3.4 Explain the areas to concentrate during safety inspections

• Ask students to define the term safety inspection • Ask the students to explain the term (a) safety audits (b) formal inspection (c) hazard spotting (d) Specific inspection and State the relationship between the appropriate places where they apply. • Ask the students to identify who should inspect to appropriate cases in 3.2 • Ask the students to explain areas to concentrate during safety inspections.

General Objective 4.0: Appreciate the various causes and fire prevention in industry


8 - 9

4.1 List the causes of fire 4.2 Describe electricity as a cause of fire and identify protective devices employed in electric circuits as other means of protection for electric circuit 4.3 Enumerate the factors which constitutes to ‘Bad house keeping’’ in industrial and business premises and how they can lead to incidences of fire 4.4 Explain how heating appliance constitute very common fire hazard and how to prevent fire from them. 4.5 Describe or explain other causes of fire in industries e.g. from welding and cutting operations, sparks from power units, ignition from chemical actions, smoking etc and how to prevent them.

• Ask the students to list the causes of fire. • Ask the students to describe electricity as a cause of fire and identify protective devices employed in electric circuits as other means of protection for electric circuit • Ask students to enumerate the factory, which constitute to ‘Bad house keeping’ in industrial and business premises and how they can lead to incidences of fire. • Ask students to explain how heat appliance constitute very common fire hazard and how to prevent fire from them • Ask students to describe or explain other causes of fire in industries e.g. from welding and cutting operations sparks from power units, ignition from chemical action smoking etc and how to prevent them.

225


(OPTION)


HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 5.0: Know the various methods and proceedings in fire fighting


10 - 12

5.1 Define the three factors that are

essential for combustion to take place

and show that the principles of fire

extinguishing lies in the elimination of

one or more of the factors.

5.2 Describe the general course of

action to be adopted by an industrial or

business premises in case of fire

including such things as evacuation

signal, allocation of duties.

5.3 Classify fire and associate the

various classes with their methods of

extinguishing.

5.4 List the different types of a manual

fire extinguisher and explain their

operations such as buckets water types

foam, vapour liquid dry powder,

carbondioxide.

5.5 Select a manual fire extinguisher

and demonstrate its use.

5.6 List the different types of automatic

fire extinguishers and explain their

operation e.g. automatic sprinklers,

drencher systems, water spray systems

etc.

5.7 List the different types of automatic

fire detection systems and explain their

operation.

5.8 Explain salvage considerations and

fire insurance.

• Ask students to define the three factors

that are essential for combustion to take

place and show that the principle of fire

extinguishing lies in the elimination of

one or more of the factors.

• Ask students to describe the general

course of action to be adopted by an

industrial or business premises in case

of fire including such things as

evacuation signals, allocation of due ties

• Ask students to explain salvage

considerations and fire insurance

226


(OPTION)


HOURS: (2,0,2)


General Objective 6.0 Appreciate the factories act and the principles involved in factory law


13 - 15

6.1 Give a general definition of a

factory as given by the factories act.

6.2 Explain the reasoning behind the

factory Act.

6.3 Outline the general health safety

and welfare provisions of the factories

Act.

6.4 Give a general review of the factory

law Specifically as it affects use and

maintenance of machinery, factory

buildings, health and safety at work

• Ask the students to give the general

definition of a factory as given by the

factories act

• Ask students to explain reasoning

behind the factory Act.

• Ask students to outline the general

health safety and welfare provision of the

factories acts.

• Ask students to give a general review

of the factory law specifically as it affects

use and maintenance of machinery,

factory buildings health and safety at

work.


(OPTION)

COURSE: SAFETY COURSE CODE: MEP 322 CONTACT HOURS

2hrs/wk


General Objective: Week


1 - 3

1.1 Identify various personal protective

equipment and demonstrate the use of each

of them.

1.2 Identify the roles of shareholders,

managers, supervisors and other workers in

contributing towards accidents prevention in

industry.



ask them to carry out the

activities

• PPE Helment

• Eye goggles

• Hand globe

• Coverall etc.

227


(OPTION)

COURSE: SAFETY COURSE CODE: MEP 322 CONTACT HOURS

2hrs/wk


2.0 Identify the causes and ways of preventing non-fire industrial accidents

4-5

2.1 Identify the types of accidents in various

workshop operations and the precautions to

be taken against them.

2.2 Demonstrate ways of communicating the

safety message to the people concerned.

2.3 Demonstrate the medical aids given to

accident victims.

• Demonstrate activities 2.1 for



3.0 Demonstrate skills in safety inspection

6-8

3.1 Carryout the following safety inspection

(i) safety audits

(ii) formal inspection

(iii) harzard spitting

(iv) specific inspection

• Demonstrate for the students to

learn and ask them to practise.

4.0 Identify causes and prevention of fire in industry

9-15

4.1 Identify various causes and prevention of

fire in industry

4.2. Identify various structural fire

precautions installed in industrial and

business premises.

4.3 Identify manual and automatic fire

extinguishers and demonstrate how to use

them.




activities.


• Manual and

automatic fire

extinguisher.

228

Internal Combustion Engines

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING: PLANT ENGINEERING

OPTION

COURSE: INTERNAL COMBUSTION

ENGINES. COURSE CODE: MEP 323

CONTACT

HOURS: (2hrs/wk


General Objective 1.0: Understand working principles of petrol and diesel engines Week

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher’s Activities Resources

1-3

1.1 Explain with the aid of sketches

the two and four stroke cycles of

operation for S.I.E and C.I.E

1.2 Compare and contrast the two

cycles mentioned in 1.1

1.3 Describe single and multi-cylinder

engines

1.4 Explain the firing order of 1.3

1.5 Explain the significance of valve

and ignition timing on engine

performance

1.6 Draw and explain a valve timing

diagram

1.7 Explain the valve operating

mechanism.

1.8 Explain with the aid of diagrams

the layout of ignition system and state

the functions of all the parts.

1.9 Explain detonation, knock, pre-

ignition, octane number and back -

firing.

• Ask students to draw and explain the

two and four stroke cycles of operation

for S.I.E and C.I.E

• Ask students to compare and contrast

the two cycles mentioned in 1.1

• Ask students to describe single cylinder

and multi cylinder engines.

• Ask students to explain the firing order

of 1.3

• Ask students to explain the significance

of valve and ignition timing on engine

performance.

• Ask students to draw and explain a

valve timing diagram

• Ask students to explain valve operating

mechanism

• Ask the students to explain using

diagrams the layout of ignition system

and state the functions of all the parts

• Ask students to explain detonation,

knock, pre-ignition, and octane number

and back firing.

• Recommended

textbooks

• Lectures notes

• Chalk

• Chalkboard

• Duster

General Objective 2.0: Know the constructional details of engine parts and it’s functions


4-5

2.1 List engine component parts and

their functions

2.2 Explain the construction and

materials used for parts such as

cylinder block, cyclinder head cylinder

liners piston crankshaft, connecting

rod etc.

229


OPTION



CONTACT

HOURS: (2hrs/wk


General Objective 3.0: Understand the fuel systems for S.I. and C.I engines


6 - 8

3.1 Explain using sketches the layout

of fuel supply systems for petrol and

diesel engines

3.2 Explain the functions of each part

of the systems in 3.1

3.3 Describe the various types of

carburetors and the component parts

of each.

3.4 Analyse the carburetor as

venturitube and derive expression for

air and fuel flow rate

3.5 Analyse the effect of air

compressibility and altitude on fuel air

ratio

3.6 Describe mixture formation

methods in compression ignition

engines

3.7 Explain the effect of fuel injection

pressure fuel penetration on nozzle

hole size.

3.8 Explain with aid of sketches in line

fuel injection pump, injector and lift

pump.

3.9 Explain calibration and phasing of

inline injection pump.

3.10 Explain the direct and indirect

injection chambers

3.11 Describe piston head Design and

valves that permit swirl

3.12 Explain the function and

operation of governors and turbo

chargers used in diesel engines

• Ask the students to explain using

sketches the layout of fuel supply

systems for petrol and diesel engines.


functions of each part of the systems in

3.1

• Ask the students to describe the various

types of carburetors and the component

parts of each

• Ask students to analyse the carburetor

as venturitube and derive expression for

air and fuel flow rate.

• Ask the students to analyse the effect of

air compressibility and altitude on fuel air

ratio.

• Ask the students to describe mixture

formation methods in compression

ignition engines

• Ask the students to explain the effect of

fuel injection pressure fuel penetration on

nozzle hole size.

• Ask the students to explain with aid of

sketches inline fuel injection pump,

injector and lift pump.

• Ask the students to explain direct and

indirect injection chambers.

• Ask the students to describe piston

head design and valves that permit swirl.


functions and operation of governors and

turbo chargers used in diesel engines

• Carburetor

• Injector pump

• Governors and

turbo chargers

230


OPTION



CONTACT

HOURS: (2hrs/wk


General Objective 4.0: Understand the cooling systems for S.I and C.I engines


9 - 10

4.1 Explain with sketches the layout of

a water pump assisted cooling

system.

4.2 Explain with sketches the

functions of the major parts such as

the water pump, radiator and its

pressure cap and thermostat

4.3 Discuss the effects of over

cooling, under cooling and their

causes and remedies


sketches the layout of a water pump

assisted cooling system

• ask the students to explain with

sketches the functions of the major parts

such as the water pump, radiator and its

pressure cap and thermostat

• ask the students to discuss the effect of

over cooling, under cooling and their

causes and remedies

General Objective 5.0: Understand the lubricating systems for S.I and C.I Engines


11-12

5.1 Explain the functions and

properties of lubricating oil.


a forced feed lubricating system


dry and wet sump lubricating system.

5.4 Explain the function and

construction of: gear type pump,

pressure relief valve, full flow and by

pass flow filter

• Ask students to explain the functions

and properties of lubricating oil


sketches the layout of a forced feed

lubricating system


sketches the layout of dry and wet sump

lubricating system

• Ask the students to explain the function

and construction of: gear type pump,

pressure relief valve full flow and by-pass

flow filter.

• Gear type pump

• Pressure relief

valve

• Filters.

231


OPTION



CONTACT

HOURS: (2hrs/wk


General Objective 6.0: Understand engine performance


13

6.1 Calculate: power (indicated,

brake, and friction) thermal efficiency

(indicated and brake) mechanical

efficiency, volumetric efficiency, mean

effective pressure (indicated and

brake,) specific fuel consumption and

air-fuel ratio.

6.2 Calculate energy balance and

draw sankey diagram

• Ask the students to calculate (i) power

(indicated brake and friction) (ii) thermal

efficiency (indicated and brake) (iii)

mechanical efficiency (iv) volumetric

efficiency (v) mean effective pressure

(indicated and brake) (vi) specific fuel

consumption (viii) air-fuel ratio

• Ask the students to calculate energy

balance and draw sankey diagram.

General Objective 7.0: Understand gas turbine engines


14-15

7.1 Analyse gas turbine cycle with or

without re-heat

7.2 Calculate parameters such as

thermal efficiency, net turbine work,

work ratio overall temperature ratio,

component efficiencies

7.3 Explain the differences in the

design of gas turbines for aircraft and

industrial applications.

7.4 Describe the application of turbine

cycles for aircraft propulsion, ram jet,

turbo jet, and turbo fan and turbo prop

engines.

7.5 Enumerate the limitations of ideal

gas turbine cycle

7.6 Explain with the aid of sketches

gas turbine engine

7.7 Compare and contrast gas turbine

engine with the reciprocation internal

combustion engine.

• Ask the students to analyse gas turbine

cycle: (i) with re-heat (ii) without reheat

• Ask the students to calculate such

parameters as: (i) thermal efficiency (ii)

net turbine work (iii) work ratio (iv) overall

temperature ratio (v) component

efficiencies.


differences in the design of gas turbines

for air craft and industrial applications


application of turbine cycles for aircraft

propulsion, ram jet, turbo jet, turbo fan

and turbo-prop engines.

• Ask the students to enumerate the

limitations of ideal gas turbine cycle

• Ask the students to explain with the aid

of sketches gas turbine engine

• Ask the students to compare and

contrast gas turbine engine with the

reciprocating internal combustion engine.

232


(OPTION)

Course: INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES Course Code: MEP 323 Contact Hours:

2,02


General Objective 1.0 Identify engine parts and its functions, appreciate fuel and cooling systems Week


1 - 5

1.1 Dismantle engine and identify all

parts and reassemble

1.2 Calibrate and phase an in-line

injection pump

1.3 Flush the cooling system of an

engine.


students to learn and ask them to practice

the activities.

• 2 stroke

engine

• 4 stroke

engine

• practical guide

2.0 Demonstrate skill in determination of engine performance

6 - 10


the characteristic performance of S.I,

C.I engines

2.2 Carryout trouble shooting of

engines.


students to learn and ask them to perform

the activities.

3.0 Demonstrate the characteristics of gas turbines

11 - 15


the characteristic of gas turbine.

• Demonstrate for the students to learn and

ask them to practise.


Gas turbine

233

Energy Conversion and Heat Transfer


(OPTION)

COURSE: ENERGY CONVERSION &

HEAT TRANSFER Course Code: MEP 311 Contact Hours: 2hr/wk


General Objective 1.0: Know the sources, Conversion and Utilization of Energy Week


1 - 3

1.1 Explain the renewable and

non- renewable sources of energy

1.2 Explain the world reserves of

non-renewable energy resources

and their rates of consumption.

1.3 Describe fossil fuels and their

application

1.4 Explain the thermodynamics of

combustion of fossil fuels.

1.5 Carry out calculations related

to the thermodynamics of fuels.

1.6 1.7 Explain the physics and

optics of solar radiation.

1.8 Describe the elements of solid-

state physics with particular

reference to photovoltaic devices.

1.9 Explain the design and

construction of devices for

conversion of solar energy to

thermal energy


renewable and non-renewable

sources of energy


world’s reserve of non-renewable

energy resources and their rates

of consumption


fossil fuels and their application

• Ask the students to carry out

calculations related to the

thermodynamics of fuel


design and construction of devices

for conversion of solar energy to

thermal energy.

• Chalk, Chalkboard duster,

gas and bomb calorimeters,

234


(OPTION)




General Objective 2.0: Know the sources, Conversion and Utilization of Energy


4-5

2.1 Calculate solar energy

conversion efficiency

2.2 Describe the devices for

conversion of solar energy to

electrical energy-photovoltaic

devices, thermoelectric converters

and thamionic devices.

2.3 Describe briefly the elements of

atomic and nuclear physics

2.4 Explain the chain reaction and

nuclear power generation.

2.5 Describe the nuclear reactor

2.6 Describe wind Energy

2.7 Explain the engineering

application of wind energy

2.8 Determine the Betz Limit

• Calculate solar energy

conversion efficiency


devices for

• For conversion of solar energy to

electrical energy - photovoltaic

devices, thermoelectric converters

and thermionic devices.


briefly the

• Elements of atomic and nuclear

physics

• Ask the students to explain chain

reaction and nuclear power

generation.

• Ask students to describe wind

energy

• Ask students to design wind mill

and determine power out put

• Determine the Betz limit

• Photovoltaic cells, DC/AC

inverters, solarimeters,

apparatus for the

determination of radioactive

projection of materials.

• Wind Tunnel

235


(OPTION)




General Objective 3.0 Understand the Modes of Heat Transfer


7-11

3.1 Explain Fourier’s Law of heat

conduction in two dimensions

3.2 Describe the methods of

solving conduction equation e.g.

analytical, numerical, graphical and

experimental.

3.3 Describe an expansion for

steady state one - dimensional

conduction through slabs,

composite walls, concentric

cylinders.

3.4 Carry out calculations involving

2.3.

3.5 Explain heat transfer by

convection

3.6 Determine surface film and

overall heat transfer coefficient.

3.7 Explain the concept of heat

transfer by natural convection.

3.8 Explain the concept of heat

transfer by forced convection.

3.9 Explain thermal radiation.

3.10 Explain the absorption,

reflection and transmission of

radiation.

3.11 Explain specular and diffuse

radiation.

3.12 Explain the emission of

radiant energy from black body

source.

• Ask students to explain Fourier’s

Law of heat conduction in two

dimensions

• Ask students to solve conduction

equation using analytical,

numerical, graphical and

experimental methods


expansion for steady state one-

dimensional conduction through

slabs, composite walls, and

concentric cylinders.

• Free and forced convection

Heat & Mass Transfer

Apparatus.

236


(OPTION)




General Objective 4.0: Understand the Application of Heat Transfer


8 - 12

4.1 Explain (a) Kirchoff’s Law (b)

Planck’s Law (c) Stefan-

Bollzmamn’s Law (d) Wien’s Law

4.2 Explain the emission of radiant

energy from grey and other bodies

4.3 Explain radiation interchange

between 2 black bodies and

between 2 grey bodies.

4.4 Explain radiation shielding

4.5 Explain total radiation

interchange in a grey enclosure.

4.6 Explain gas and flame radiation

4.7 Solve simple problems on the

above.

4.8 Explain the types of heat

exchanges (a) recuperators (b) fins

(c) cooling towers.

4.9 Explain how heat transfer

coefficient is used in the design of

heat exchangers.

4.10 Explain the various solar

collectors

4.11 Explain how the various

modes of heat transfer affect the

performance of solar collectors.

• Ask students to explain peculiar

and diffuse radiation


emission of radiant energy from

black body source.


Kirchioff’s Law, Stefan-

Bollzmamn’s Law and Wien’s Law

and Planck’s Law.

• Ask students to explain emission

of radiant energy from grey and

other bodies.

• Ask students to explain radiation

interchange between two black

bodies and two grey surfaces

• Ask students to explain radiation

shielding

• Ask students to explain total

radiation interchange in a grey

enclosure

• Ask students to explain gas and

flame radiation

• Ask the students to solve simple

problems on the above

• Ask students to explain the types

of heat exchanger (i) recuperators

(ii) fins (iii) cooling towers

• Ask students to explain the effect

of various modes of heat transfer

on the performance of solar

collectors.

• Pyranometers

237


(OPTION)

Course: ENERGY CONVERSION & HEAT

TRANSFER Course Code: MEP 311 Contact Hours: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 1.0 Demonstrate conversion and utilization of Energy and methods of heat

transfer Week


1 - 10

1.1 Identify the various devices for

conversion of different forms of energy.

1.2 Carry out experiment to analyse the

products of combustion of fossil fuels.

1.3 Carry out experiment to demonstrate

heat transfer by - conduction, convention

and radiation.




activities.

• Thermal conductivity

apparatus, orsat

apparatus

• Free and forced

convection Heat and

mass transfer

apparatus.

2.0 Demonstrate the application of Heat Transfer

11 - 15

2.1 Perform experiment to verify the

following laws

(a) Kirchoff’s law

(b) Planck’s law

(c) Stefan Boltzman’s law

(d) Wien’s Law

(e) Fourier’s Law of

Thermodynamics

• Demonstrate activity 2.1 for


them to practice the activity.


238

Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning

COURSE: REFRIGERATION AND AIR-

CONDITIONING COURSE CODE:MEP 411

CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,3)


General Objective 1.0: Understand the principles of Refrigeration Week


1 - 2

1.1 Explain the basic principles including

the working of Bell Coloman cycle

1.2 Describe sensible, latent and

expansion methods of producing

refrigeration

1.3 Explain the vapour compression

method of refrigeration

1.4 Explain the vapour absorption

method as a way of refrigeration

1.5 Define thermo-electric process and

explain its application for refrigeration

1.6 Explain steam jet as method

applicable for producing refrigeration

• Ask the students to explain basic

principles including the working Bell

Coloman cycle


sensible latent and expansion methods of

producing refrigeration

• Ask the students to explain the vapour

compression method of refrigeration

• Ask the students to explain the vapour

absorption method as a way of

refrigeration


a. define the thermo-

electric process

b. to explain its

application for

refrigeration

• Ask the students to explain steam-jet as

a method applicable for producing

refrigeration

General Objective 2.0: Understand the application of refrigeration


3

2.1 List the various applications of

refrigeration such as transportation, food

preservation, comfort cooling, air-

conditioning etc.


refrigeration in the items list in 2.1

2.3 Describe the domestic, commercial

and industrial applications of

refrigeration

Ask the students to list the various

application of refrigeration, such as

transportation, food preservation, comfort

cooling, air-conditioning

Ask the students to explain the

application of refrigeration in terms listed

in 2.1

Ask the students to describe the

domestic, commercial and industrial

application of refrigeration.

239



CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,3)


General Objective 3.0: Understanding the Vapour-compression refrigeration system


4

3.1 State the parts of a typical plant e.g.

Compressor, condenser, evaporator etc.

3.2 Describe the ideal refrigeration

cycles using the P-h and T-s diagrams

to define such terms as refrigerating

effect, work done, C.O.P, etc

3.3 Define terms related to performance

e.g. Refrigeration-effect, work done,

C.O.P

3.4 Explain the limitations of the ideal

cycle

3.5 Describe the practical cycle using

the P-h and T-s diagrams

3.6 Explain the effect of the following

performance in the basic practical cycle

to suction heat exchanger, multistage

compression with inter-cooling, flash

chamber

• Ask the students to understand the part

of a typical plant

• Ask the students to describe the ideal

refrigeration cycles using the P-h and T-s

diagrams to define such terms as

refrigeration effect, work done, C.O.P, etc

• Ask students to define terms related to

performance e.g. ref. Effect, work done,

C.O.P

• Ask the students to solve problem

involving ideal cycles.

• Ask students to Solve problems

involving ideal cycles.

• Ask the students to explain why the

limitations of ideal cycle


practical cycle using the P-h and T-s

diagrams

• Ask the student to explain the effect of

the following performance in the basic

practical heat exchanger multistage

compressor with inter-cooling flash

chamber

240



CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,3)


General Objective 4.0: Understand the absorption of refrigeration system


5

4.1 Explain the principle of operation of

an absorption system.

4.2 Explain the operation of the simple

ammonia-water cycle

4.3 State and describe requirements for

refrigerant absorbent combination

4.4 Explain the member - platen

refrigeration (vapour absorption) with

pump refrigerator

4.5 Describe the water-lithium bromide

cycle

4.6 Determine the heat ratio; (efficiency)

of an absorption systems

• Ask the students to define the principle

of operation

• Ask the students the operation of the

simple ammonia-water cycle.

• Ask the students to identity the

desirable requirements for refrigeration

absorbent combination


menters-platen refrigerator (vapour

absorption) with pump refrigerator

• Ask the students to describe water-

lithium bromide cycle

• Ask the students to determine the heat

ratio (efficiency) of an absorption system

6-7

4.7 Identify ways in which the efficiency

of the absorption system may be

improved

4.8 Compare the absorption system and

the vapour compression system with

respect to applications, advantages and

disadvantages

4.9 Explain absorption refrigeration

principles in the laboratory

4.10 Explain the applications of solar

energy to refrigeration

• Ask the students to identify ways in

which the efficiency of the absorption

system may be improved.

• Ask the students to compare the

absorption system and the vapour

compression system with respect to

applications, advantages and

disadvantages.

• Ask the students to demonstrate

absorption refrigeration principles in the

laboratory

• Ask the students to demonstrate the

applications of solar energy to

refrigeration

• Lab

• Solar

system/room

model

241

COURSE: REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING

COURSE CODE:MEP 411 CONTACT HOURS: (2,0,3)


General Objective 5.0: Know refrigerants and their use


8 - 9

5.1 Define the term “refrigerant” 5.2 State the characteristics desired in a refrigerant 5.3 Explain the refrigerant numbering system 5.4 Describe the use of refrigerants 5.5 Explain the effect of moisture on refrigerants 5.6 Distinguish between primary and secondary refrigerants 5.7 Explain the use of secondary refrigerants 5.8 Describe the use of eutectic diagrams in the selection of secondary refrigerants

• Ask the students to define the term refrigerant. • Ask the students to state the characteristics desired in a refrigerant • Ask the students to explain refrigerant numbering system. • Ask the student to describe the use of refrigerants • Ask the students to explain the effect of moisture on refrigerants • Ask the students to distinguish between primary and secondary refrigerants • Ask the students to explain the use of secondary refrigerants • Ask the students to describe the use of eutectic diagrams in the selection of secondary refrigerants

General Objective 6.0: Know the use and Maintenance of hand tools commonly used in Refrigerant pipework


10 - 12

6.1 List the hand tools commonly used in refrigeration such as:

a. Pipe faring tools b. Pipe cutter c. Gauge manifold d. Springs bending devices e. Valve stem and gland sock f. Brazing equipment

6.2 Explain the use of above hand tools.6.3 State the precaution taken when handling toxic and explosive refrigerants6.4 List the major components of a typical air conditioner 6.7 State functions of the components of an air-conditioner and a refrigerator State the application of an air conditioner

• Ask the students to list the hand tools commonly used in refrigeration such as listed in 6.1 • Ask the students to state the precautions taken when handling toxic and explosive refrigerants • Ask the students to repeat 6.4 for a typical refrigerator • Ask the students to list the major components of a typical air-conditioner • Ask the student to repeat 6.7 for a refrigerator. • Ask the students to state the functions listed in 6.6 • Ask the students to state the applications of an air-conditioner

242



CONTACT

HOURS: (2,0,3)


General Objective 7.0: Understand evaporators


13 - 15

7.1 List the various types of evaporators

such as:

a. Direct cooler

expansion

b. Finned evaporator

c. Plate-surface

evaporator

d. Flooded shell and

tube type

e. Shell and coil cooler

f. Banded type

g. Flooded raceway

type, etc

7.2 Explain the operation and

construction of the evaporators


disadvantages of each of the

evaporators in 7.1

7.4 Explain how evaporators are

designed

7.5 Enumerate factors that control the

ratings and selection of evaporators for

specific duties

7.6 Carry out simple designs and

selection of evaporators

• Ask the students to list the various

types of evaporators as listed in 7.1


operation and construction of the

evaporators.


advantages and disadvantages of each

of the evaporators in 7.1

• Ask the students to explain how the

evaporators are designed

• Ask the students to enumerate factors

that control the ratings and selection of

evaporators for specific duties

243

REFRIDGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING

Course Code: MEP 411 Contact Hours: 2hrs/wk

Course Specific: PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objective: Demonstrate skills in use and maintenance of condensers and cooling tower Week


1-6

1.1 Identify the various types of condensers such as:

a. Water cooled condensers (shell and tube with vertical or horizontal arrangement, double tube, shell and coil etc) b. Air-cooled condensers (natural convection; forced convection); evaporative condenser.

1.2 Demonstrate the operations and constructions of the condensers listed in 1.1 1.3 Enumerate factors that control the rating and selection of condensers for specific duties

• Ask the students to list the various types of condensers such as:

a. Water cooled condensers (shell and tube with vertical or horizontal arrangement, double tube, shell and coil, etc b. Air cooled condensers (natural convection; forced convection); evaporative condenser

• Ask the students to explain the operations and constructions of the condensers listed in 8.1 • Ask the students to state the advantages and disadvantages of each type of condenser • Ask the students to enumerate factors that control the rating and selection of condensers for specific duties

7 - 10

1.4 Carry out simple designs and selection of condensers using appropriate data 1.5 Enumerate factors that govern cooling towers design, rating and selection 1.6 Carry out simple design and selection of cooling towers 1.7 Perform experiments on air conditioning trainer 1.8 Perform experiments on cooling tower

• Ask students to carry out simple designs and selection of condensers using appropriate data. • Ask the students to enumerate factors that govern cooling towers design, rating and selection • Ask the students to carry out simple design and selection of cooling towers • Ask the students to explain the suitability of either condenser or cooling tower type for a given job and highlight the usual problems associated with condenser or cooling towers and the solutions • Ask the students to perform experiments on air conditioning trainer • Ask the students to perform experiments on cooling tower

244

REFRIDGERATION AND

AIRCONDITIONING Course Code: MEP 411

Contact Hours:

2hrs/wk

Course Specific: PRACTICAL CONTENT

2.0 Demonstrate skills in the service and maintenance of air-conditional and refrigerator

11-15

2.1 Dismantle and assemble a

typical room air conditional

components

2.2 Dismantle and assemble a

typical refrigerator.


students to learn and ask them to carryout

the activities.


• An

airconditional

• A refrigerator

• A complete tool

box.

245

Mechanical Equipment in Buildings

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - (PLANT


COURSE: MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN

BUILDINGS COURSE CODE: MEP 412

CONTACT

HOURS: 2hrs/wk

COURSE SPECIFICATION:THEORETICAL CONTENT

General Objective 1.0: Understand the different types of conveyors used in building Week


1

1.1 Explain conveyors in buildings.

1.2 List different types of conveyors used in

buildings.

1.3 Explain details of construction, capacity

and application of Escalators and Lifts.

1.4 Describe the following components:

(i) Car,

(ii) Cable (different kinds of

roping)

(iii) Shaft,

(iv) Rail,

(v) Over-run.


• What conveyors are:

• Why they are needed in buildings

• List some types

• Explain the escalators and lists

and their applications.

• Describe, car cable, shaft, rail,

over-run as applied to lift system

• To be conveyed

with field trips.

2

1.5 State the functions of the components in

1.4

1.6 Distinguish between the following types of

Lifts:

a. Lift with cable/Traction

sheave;

b. Hydraulic Lift.

1.7 Explain the criteria for Lift Selection

• Show difference between Lift with

Cable/traction sheave and

Hydraulic Lift.


criteria for selection of Lift for a

given application.

Assess.

246





CONTACT

HOURS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 2.0: Know the equipment in the machine room


3

2.1 List the equipment to be installed in the

machine.

2.2 Describe each of the equipment in the

machine room.

2.3 Explain the functions of each of the

equipment described in 2.2.

2.4 State reasons for positioning the machine

room above or beneath the shaft.

2.5 State the factors that affect the choice of

different types of each equipment listed in 2.1.

Ask students to:

• State the equipment commonly

housed in the machine room.

• Describe each equipment in the

machine room and explain their

functions.

• Explain why the machine room

may be positioned above the shaft

or beneath it.

• State the factors that are

considered in selecting the

equipment listed.

General Objective 3.0: Understand the Control System of Conveyors


3.1 Explain how the speed of the car is

controlled, and state speed limits for different

types of Lifts.

3.2 State the use of Rheostat (resistance)

variable voltage and varied speed governor.

3.3 Explain the operations of the following

control systems:

a. car switch, manually

operated system.

b. Button control (SAPS)

c. Down collective control

d. Full - collective control

e. Simplex, Duplex, Triplex

(group) control.

f. Programmed control.

3.4 Explain the following Lift signals:

a. all registered light.


• Explain the need for and how

speed control is effected in Lifts

• State speed limits for different

types of Lifts.

• State the use of variable voltage

and varied speed governor.

• Explain the operations of car

switch, manual control system.

• List the signals associated with lift

operations and explain them

• Explain the operation of lift doors.

• Assess.

247

b. “in use” light with SAPB

c. Position indicator (inside

car)

d. Position indicator (at arrow

lights)

e. The travel direction arrow

lights

f. Lanterns/gongs to show

when car has landed at a

floor.

3.5 Describe the operation of lift doors with

specific reference to:

a. car and hoistway doors

b. manual opening/closing of

doors.

c. Power operated doors

d. Transfer time for loading

and unloading of car.

e. Need to keep door open

3.6 Explain how the floor selector operates.

248





CONTACT

HOURS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 4.0 Know system relationship and other design criteria for Lifts.


6-7

4.1 Define a counter weight and travel time. 4.2 State the functions of counter weight in design. 4.3 Determine counter weights for specific application. 4.4 Determine the travel time. 4.5 Determine Traction sheave or drum torque 4.6 Explain the following:

a. Effect of friction on drum torque b. Maximum permissible acceleration to prevent slip

4.7 Explain duty cycle diagrams. 4.8 Estimate the power of an electric motor required installation of the duty cycle diagram.4.9 Determine the motor using the RMS Torque and the empirical equivalent travel time. 4.10 Explain the criteria for Cable/Rope selection e.g.

a. right choice of material b. construction types e.g. regular lay, long-lay c. rope designation (Diameter, No of strands, No of wires per strand) d. bending stresses on ropes e. rope pressure on Traction sheave f. rope life, effects of types of roping, average speed of car, numbers of bends,,statics and dynamic loading, factor of safety.

• Ask students to explain the use of

counter weights in Lifts.

• Explain maximum acceleration to

prevent slip.

• Sketch duty cycle diagrams and

relate them to the power of an

electric motor to go with the

system.

• Ask students to carry out some

exercises on Cable/Rope selection

base on 4.10

• Ask students to carry out Trouble

shooting inspection and repairs on

ropes.

249





CONTACT

HOURS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 5.0: Understand the layout for Lift installation.


9

5.4 Explain the factors which influence the

following

a. grouping Lifts together

b. positioning the Lifts (for

best utilization)

c. size of the life

d. number of Lifts

e. limiting the noise due to lift

operation

f. aesthetic features e.g. kind

of finish.

• Ask students to; explain the

factors that affect, lift grouping,

positioning, sizing, noise and

aesthetics.

• Ask students to design a Lift

system based on available

information/data on a building

• Assess

General Objective 6.0: Know the basic Installation precaution and maintenance details of lift.


10-11

6.1 Explain the use of plumblie, the

measurements of wall distances to

centerlines and the use of working drawings.

6.2 List the difficulties associated with

installing a lift in an existing building.

6.3 Explain the positioning of guides and

diversion pulleys.

6.4 Explain maintenance and repairs on Lifts.


• Plumbing’s and the use of

working drawings

• Explain difficulties associated with

installing a lift in an existing

building.

• Explain the positioning of guides

and diversion pulleys.

• Assess.

250





CONTACT

HOURS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 7.0: Understand the selection, installation and maintenance of pumps, boilers and

other mechanical equipment in buildings


12-13

7.1 State the different types of pumps such as

centrifugal, rotary, reciprocating and

submersible.

7.2 Describe the procedure for installing water

pumps in buildings.

7.3 State the factors guiding the selection of

water pumps.

7.4 State the effects of pumps vibration on

buildings and the precautions needed to

minimize these effects.

7.5 Explain trouble shooting strategies and

maintenance of pumps.

7.6 State the types of boilers used for hot

water supply.

7.7 State factors guiding the selection of

boilers

7.8 Explain the role of boiler auxiliaries such

as super heater, economizer, control valves,

safety valves and boiler mountings.

• Ask students to explain: • list different types of pumps • explain the procedure for installing pumps in buildings • explain the criteria for pump selection • explain the effects of pump vibration on buildings and prevention of the effects. • Ask students to prepare for installing a Lift system in an exit building stating problems encountered and solution • Carry out fault diagnosis and service/repair of pumps. • State the types of boilers for hot water supply. • State the criteria for boiler selection • Explain the roles of boiler heaters, economizers control valves, safety valves and boiler mountings

• Samples of the

different types of

pumps

• Boiler unit

14-15

7.9 Explain the installation procedures for

boilers.

7.10 State the inspection procedures for

boilers.

7.11 Explain the operation of the following

equipment:

a. Laundry machine

b. Process heaters

c. Kitchen equipment

7.12 State factors guiding the selection of

items in 7.11.

Explain inspection procedures

carried on boilers.

Explain the operation of laundry

machines, process heaters, kitchen

equipment.

State the criteria for boiler

selection.

Assess.

• Pressure

gauges

251





CONTACT

HOURS: 2hrs/wk


General Objective 8.0: Know the fire fighting equipment used in buildings.


8.1 List important fire fighting equipment to be

installed in a building

8.2 List first Aid equipment such as Hot reel

system, Hand appliance, Sprinkler, Total

flooding system

8.3 Explain the construction and operation of

each of the systems in 8.2

8.4 State fixed equipment e.g. wet riser, Dry

rise.

8.5 Describe the construction and operations

of fixed equipment in 8.3


• List important, fire fighting

equipment to be used in buildings.

• Explain the use of hot reel

system, hand appliance, sprinkler

and total flooding system.

• Explain the construction of hot

reel, equipment, and appliances,

total flood equipment.

• Explain the construction of wet

riser, dry riser.

• Explain the functions of wet riser

and dry riser.

• Assess.





CONTACT

HOURS: 3hrs/wk


General Objective 1.0: Identify the types and use of conveyors Week


1 - 3

1.1 Identify the various types of conveyors

used in building

1.2 Demonstrate the use of all the conveyors

1.3 Identify and demonstrate the criteria for

lift selection.


the students to learn and ask them

to carryout all the activities.


252





CONTACT

HOURS: 3hrs/wk


2.0: Identify the equipment in the machine room and its use


4 - 5

2.1 Identify the equipment commonly

housed in the machine room

2.2 Demonstrate the use of all the

equipment



to perform the activities.

3.0 Identify and demonstrate the use of control system of conveyors


6 - 7

3.1 Identify the control system of conveyors

3.5 Demonstrate the operation of the

following control systems:-

(i) Car Switch, manually

operated system

(ii) Button control (SAPS)

(iii) Down collective control

(iv) Full collective control

(v) Simplex, Duplex, Triplex

(group) control

(vi) Programmed Control



to carryout all the activities.

4.0 Demonstrate skills in the installation, repairs and maintenance of lift


4.1 Identify the difficulties associated with

installing a lift in an existing building.

4.2 Demonstrate the positioning of guides

and diversion pulleys



to perform all the activities

253

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - (PLANT ENGINEERING (OPTION)

COURSE: MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN BUILDINGS

COURSE CODE: MEP 412 CONTACT HOURS: 3hrs/wk


5.0 Demonstrate skills in the selection, installation and maintenance of pumps, boilers and other mechanical equipments.


8 - 11

5.1 Identify the different types of pumps such as - centrifugal, rotary, reciprocating and submersible. 5.2 Select suitable water pumps for a particular operation. 5.3 Demonstrate the procedure for installing water pumps in building. 5.4 Identify the types of boilers used for hot water supply 5.5 Identify the factors for the selection of boilers 5.6 Demonstrate the installation and inspection procedures for boilers 5.7 Demonstrate operation and installation procedures of the following:

i) Laundry machine ii) Process heaters iii) Kitchen equipment.

5.8 Carryout trouble shooting and maintenance of the items above.

• Demonstrate activities 5.1 to 5.8 for the students to barn and ask them to perform all the activities. • Assess the students.

• Pumps • Boilers • Pressure gauges

6.0 Identify the fire fighting equipment used in buildings


12 - 15

6.1 Identify important fire fighting equipment installed in a building 6.2 Identify first Aid equipment such as Hot reel system, Hand appliance, sprinkler, Total flooding system. 6.3 Demonstrate the operation of each of the systems in 6.2 6.4 Identify fixed equipment e.g. wet riser, Dry riser, etc. 6.5 Demonstrate the operation of fixed equipment in 6.4.

• Demonstrate activities 6.1 to 6.5 for the students to learn and ask them to perform all the activities. • Assess the students.

254

Automotive Technology


(OPTION)

COURSE: AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY Course Code: MEP 413 Contact Hours:

2hr/wk


General Objective 1.0 To know and understands automotive vehicle systems. Week


1

1.1 Know the construction of vehicle chasis

1.2 List the material sections used e.g. (a) channel

section. (b) 1-section, (e) top hat section etc.

1.3 List and describe method of joining the frames e.g.

welding etc.

1.4 List and describe methods of reinforcing the frame

joints e.g. by gusset plates

1.5 List and describe the modes of chasis frame

deflection. e.g. bending, torsion, loosening, etc.

• Show students

different material

section used for chasis

frame construction

• 1.2 to 1.4

• Illustrate 1.1 to 1.5

with good diagrams

and make notes

General Objective 2.0: Know vehicle body construction and body styling With different body structure


2

2.1 List and describe types of body structure (a) non-

load carrying separate body and (b) the semi-integral

type (c) the integral type

2.2 Describe car body construction and material

requirement for (a) body posts (b) understand assembly

(c) the shroud and dash panel assembly (d) roof and

back window aperture panel assembly (e) center pillar

(f) bulk head (g) Front end (h) front fenders (i) rear

fenders (j) door panel (k) bonnet panels, (l) boot

assembly

• Illustrate 2.1 to 2.2

with diagrams and

make notes.

• Motor car, Tool

Boxes

255


(OPTION)


2hr/wk


General Objective 3.0: Describe Commercial vehicle body


3

3.1 Distinguish between light commercial vehicles,

heavy commercial vehicles, Waste/refuse disposal

vehicle

3.2 Describe articulated vehicles as combination of

tractive unit and semi-trailers

3.3 Compare rigid vehicle and articulated vehicle.

3.3 Describe methods of coupling either rigid vehicle or

articulated vehicle to their trailers

3.4 Describe the construction of (a) towing jaw hook

and eye. (b) Fifth wheel coupling (c) automatic wheel

coupling (d) Specific methods.

• Explain and illustrate

3.1 to 3.5 with

diagrams and notes.


• Pick-up van, 1no

Bus (1no) Refuse

Disposals vehicle

(1no)

• Articulated

vehicle

General Objective 4.0: Knowunderstand and describe vehicle dynamics systems


4

4.1 Describe with sketches layout of the suspension

system (a) coil spring, (b) torsion bar (c) rubber springs,

(d) leaf springs

4.2 Describe with sketches hydro-pneumatic and

fluid/gas suspension system

4.3 Describe independent suspension utilizing (a)

wishbones and (b) swinging arm; ball joints, bushes,


4.1 to 4.3 with good

diagrams and notes.

256


(OPTION)


2hr/wk


General Objective 5.0: Know, understand and describe vehicle steering systems


5

7.1 Describe with sketches types of steering systems

(a) worm and peg (b) worm and wheel (c) re-circulating

ball (d) rack and pinion.

7.2 Describe methods of adjustment of 5.1 above for

end-float and back clash in steering boxes.

7.3 State methods of Lubrication and sealing of steering

boxes.

7.4 Explain different types of collapsible steering

column arrangements.

7.5 Describe faults diagnoses and repairs of steering

systems.

7.6 Describe principles of casters, camber, being pin

inclination, and center poin steering.

7.7 Describe power assisted steering e.g. ram-type

General Objective 6.0: Know, understand and describe brake systems


6

6.1 Describe layout and operation of drum and disc brake assemble. 6.2 Describe master cylinder servo unit, wheel cylinders, pipes, brake assistors etc. and maintenance procedures. 6.3 Know and understand compressed air brake system components, e.g. compressor, compressed air tanks, control valves, unloader valves, pressure regulating valves, brakeactuators. 6.4 Identify brake circuit diagrams/arrangement for trailer braking 6.5 Know brake testing regulation, brake efficiency and use of static and dynamic (road roller and decelerometer) test equipment to examine brakes performance. 6.6 Describe anti-jack knife device e.g. develop maxaret system and hope anti-knife system


6.1 to 6.6 with

diagrams and notes.

257


(OPTION)


2hr/wk


General Objective 7.0: Know vehicle transmission system


7

7.1 State purposes of transmission system

7.2 Describe (a) friction clutches - center plate, pressure

plate.

7.3 Describe multiplate clutches

7.4 Describe manually operated gear boxes

7.5 Describe synchromesh and constant mesh devices

7.6 Describe location of speedometer drive

7.7 Describe overdrive, transfer box


7.1 to 7.8 with

diagrams and notes.


• Clutch assembly

(5no)

Manual gear box

(3-4-5 speed)(5no)

General Objective 8.0: Know, understand automotive gear box


8

8.1 Disassemble automatic gear box

8.2 Describe with sketches the assembly of automatic

gear box


with diagrams and

notes.

General Objective 9.0: Know, describe propeller and drive shafts


9

9.1 Sketch and describe constant velocity joints e.g.

double hook’s, Weiss

9.2 Sketch front wheel drive

9.3 Describe torque tube drive


with diagrams and

notes.

General Objective 10.0: Know and understand final drive


10

10.1 Describe Rear differential gear system e.g. pinion

crown wheel (bevel gear differential)

10.2 Explain rear Axles. State assembly of half shafts

10.3 Describe methods of locating half shafts in final

drives, e.g. semi-floating, three quarter floating and full

floating


with diagrams and

notes

258


(OPTION)


2hr/wk


General Objective 11.0: Know and understand Automotive Electrical starting system.


11

11.1 Describe construction of starter motor

11.2 Describe operation of solenoid switch, bendix drive

11.3 Describe starter switch

• Explain starter motor

• Explain armature,

commutator, brushes

and mountings

• Bushings, stator

windings, solenoid,

Bendix drive.

• Starter motor

assembly (10no)

• Switch/relay unit

(10no)

General Objective 12.0: Know, understand Auto-charging system


12

12.1 Describe the construction of alternator

12.2 Describe operation of voltage regulator, Cut-out,

current regulator

• Explain alternator

assembly to students

• Explain rotor, stator,

slip rings, brushes,

bearing bush, rectifier

and mounting, Voltage

regulator

General Objective 13.0: Know and understand Battery


13

13.1 State different capacities of car batteries and their

ratings.

13.2 Explain how to prepare acid

13.3 Explain how to operate battery charger

13.4 Explain how to fill battery with correct acid

13.5 Explain how to charge car battery

• Explain Battery to

students

• Prepare acid for filling

battery

• Show students how to

connect battery to

battery charger

• Battery, distilled

water, sulphuric

acid.

• Hydrometer

(10no)

• Battery charger

and connecting

cables (10no.)

259


COURSE: AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY Course Code: MEP 413 Contact Hours: 2hr/wk


General Objective 14.0: Know and understand auto-ignition system


14

14.1 Describe principles of spark ignition 14.2 Describe ignition coil 14.3 Describe spark plug and spark plug Setting 14.4 Describe Distributor - contact breaker Capacitor 14.5 Differentiate between high tension circuit, and low tension circuit 14.6 Know ignition lining - advance and retard- mechanisms Know electronic ignition system


with diagrams and

notes.

General Objective 15.0: Know and understand vehicle lighting system, and wipers


15

15.1 State Ministry of Transport lighting requirements

15.2 Describe construction of head lights - sealed and

unsealed - and wiring

15.3 Describe trafficators, hazard lights

15.4 Describe fuse box configuration


with diagrams and

notes.

General Objective 16.0: Understand wheel and tyre types and safety precautions when removing fitting wheels and tyres


16.1 Distinguish between tyres which are (a) tubed and (b) tubeless, whether cross-ply or radial ply 16.2 State the legal requirements when fitting diagonal-ply, cross-ply and radial-ply tyres to a vehicle 16.3 Explain tyre dimensions, size and types for specific vehicle application 16.4 Explain dynamic, and static balancing of wheels 16.5 Describe typical tyre valves, both rubber and metal. 16.6 Explain tyre air pressures 16.7 Explain dynamic, and static balancing of wheels 16.8 Explain front wheel alignment and effect on tyre wear, toe in or toe out 16.9 Explain vulcanizing principles.

• Explain to students

how to carry out wheel

alignment.

• Explain to the

students quick patch,

and heat application.

• Various tyre

types, wheel tyres

• Wheel alignment

equipment (5no)

• Air compressor

(1no)

• Tyre patch (5nos)

• Tyre pressure

gauge (10no)

260


(OPTION)

Course: AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY Course Code: MEP 413 Contact Hours: 2,0,3


General Objective 1.0 Identify and repair chais frames, body and body styling Week


1-3

1.1 Identify the construction of a vehicle

chasis

1.2 Carryout welding, etc of broken chasis

frames, fitting of chasis frames.

1.3 Identify and dismantle body component

parts to locate fixing points, joint, locks.




• Life vehicles 2nos

• Vehicle pit 2nos

• Car lift 1no

• 1.3, 15No Electric

Arc welding kit.

• Welding

electrodes.

2.0 Identify and maintain vehicle dynamics and steering systems


4-6

2.1 Identify vehicle suspension system

such as civil spring, leaf springs, etc.

2.2 Dismantle these suspension systems,

identify the components and assemble

them.

2.3 Dismantle steering system units and

identify the components and assemble

them.





• Complete tool box

• 5Nos coil spring

• leaf springs 5nos

• 5nos torsion bar

• Hydro-pneumatic

suspension unit

5nos.

• Different steering

assemblies

• Rack and pinium

• Power assisted

steering assembly.

261


(OPTION)



3.0 Identify and maintain brake and transmission system


7- 9

3.1 Identify brake for different types of

vehicles

3.2 Dismantle, identify components of

brake system and assemble them.

3.3 Carryout maintenance of brake system

3.4 Perform Brake bleeding

3.5 Dismantle clutch and gear, identify all

components and assemble them.

3.6 Carryout an overhaul of automatic gear

box.

3.7 Remove and replace universal joints

3.8 Carry out an overhaul of final drive

system and identify differential assembly,

crown wheel, pinion, differential cage.



them to carryout all the activities.


• Drum/disc brake

assemblies

• Master cyclinder

and types

• Air brake system

and bed

• Brake test

equipment

• Differential gears

• Half shafts

assemblies.

4.0 Identify and maintain Automotive Electrical system


10 - 13

4.1 Dismantle starter motor to identify

armature, commutator, brushes and

mounting. Stator winding, solenoid and

Bendix drive and assemble them.

4.2 Carryout overhaul of alternator

4.3 Prepare acid for filling battery and

connect battery to battery charger.

4.4 Identify ignition system components -

ignition coil, distributor, capacitor, contact

braker set, high tension cables.

4.5 Trouble shoot and repair faults in

system.

4.6 Overhaul wiper systems.

• Demonstrates activities 4.1 to 4.6



• Alternator

assembly

• Hydrometer

• Battery charger

and connecting

cables

• Ignition system

components

(10nos.)

• Sparks plugs.

(20nos)

• Start motor

assembly

• Switch/relay unit

(10Nos.)

262


(OPTION)



5.0 Identify and maintain tyres


14 - 15

5.1 Identify different types for different

vehicles

5.2 Carryout road wheel assembly

balancing, and alignment

5.3 Carryout quick patch, and heat

application



them to carryout all the activities.


• Various tyre tyres

• Balancing and

alignment machine

• Air compressor

• Tyre patch

• Tyre pressure

gauge.

263

Process, Construction and Mining Equipment


OPTION)

COURSE: PROCESS, CONSTRUCTION & MINING EQUIPMENT

Course Specification: Practical Content COURSE CODE: MEP 421 CONTACT HOURS: (1,0,2)

General Objective 1.0: Understand the operations of the basic structure and mechanisms contained within

the common maintenance requirement of Mobile equipment

Week Specific Learning Objective Teachers Activities Resources.

1-3

1.1 Tractors and related equipment: Crawler and wheeled:

a. Bulldozers b. Tractor-shovels (front end loaders) c. Scrapers

• Ask students to complete a

maintenance profile of a piece

of the listed equipment

• Visits to mines, quarries and road

construction recommended to see

operation and maintenance

4-6

1.2 Excavating equipment

a) Power

shovels

b) Draglines

c) Hoes




• Assess.

7-8

1.3 Material movement a) Rear dump truck b) Bottom dump truck c) Side dump wagons d) Bridge and Gantry cranes e) Conveyors and related equipment




• Assess

9-10

1.4 Cutting and boring

equipment

a) Jackhammers

b) Rotary drills

c) Tunneling

machines

d) Pile drivers




• Assess

264


OPTION)

COURSE: PROCESS, CONSTRUCTION & MINING EQUIPMENT

Course Specification: Practical Content COURSE CODE: MEP 421 CONTACT HOURS: (1,0,2)

General Objective 2.0: Deep Mining Special Equipment


11-13

2.1 Hoists

2.2 Pumps

2.3 Ventilation

2.4 Roof supports




• Assess

General Objective 3.0: Material Sizing


14-15

3.1 Crushing equipment

3.2 Drying equipment

3.3 Screening

3.4 Separation

3.5 Mixing

Ask students to complete a



Assess

265

Electro-Mechanical Controls


OPTION

COURSE: ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

CONTROLS Course Code: MEP 424

Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)


General Objective: 1.0 Understand general control elements and systems Week


1.1 State the functions of control devices in R & A. 1.2 List elements such as:

a. Sensing elements b. Signal transmission part.

• Explain and illustrate with diagrams

and notes

• Recommended

textbook

• Lecture notes

• Chalk

• Chalk board

1.3 Explain the functions of the elements listed in 1.2. 1.4 List the main control system such as:

a. self acting b. pneumatics c. hydraulic d. two position method e. proportional method f. floating method


functions of sensing elements and

transmission. part.

• Ask the students to;

• State types of control system

• Characteristics of control.

* Chalk board

General Objective 2.0: Understand how comparative is controlled


2.1 Explain the function of thermostat. 2.2 List thermostats types such as;

a. (electric, electronic pneumatic or clock types) b. pneumatic thermostats c. electronic thermostats d. surface thermostat e. direct acting and indirect acting thermostats f. Insertion thermostats

• Ask the students to state

• what they understand to be a

thermostat

• explain how the thermostat functions.

• Ask the students to mention types of

thermostats

• to state their functions

• Lab demonstration

equipment

• sample

266


OPTION



Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)


General Objective 2.0: Understand how comparative is controlled


2.3 Explain the operations of the

thermostats listed in 2.2.

2.4 State the application of thermostats

listed in 2.2

2.5 List the factor guiding the electronic

thermostat

2.6 Carry out the maintenance on

thermostats.


operation of the thermostats.

• Ask the student to mention the

applications (situation) where the

thermostats are used).

• \ask the students to mention what

and what affect the sensibility and

operation of the thermostats

• Ask the students

i. to state common

faults

• Lab equipment.

267


OPTION



Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)


General Objective 3.0: Understand humidity Control.


3.1 State the need for humidity control.

3.2 List the sensing elements types of

humidistat used in A.R such as

a. non-first system

b. sil moisture sensitive

salts

c. hair

d. synthetic fibres

e. resistance types

(resistance changing

with humidity used with

wheatstone Bridge).

f. Combined wet bulb

and dry bulb

temperature

g. Length changing

type

3.3 Explain the operation of humidistat

types using the sensing elements listed

in 3.2

3.4 State the application of humidistat.

3.5 List the factors guiding the solution

of humidistat.

3.6 Explain the operation of the

following devices.

a. drier/dehydrator

b. humidifier

• Ask the student

• to appreciate air moisture content

• to state the effect of moisture in the

air and the environment

• to state the need for control

• to define humidity

• Ask the students to mention the

humidistat listed in 3.2.

• Ask the student to explain their

understanding of the operations of

each of the humidistat listed in 3.2.


applications of humidistat in 3.2.

• Ask the students to list what factors

influence the output of humidistat.

• Ask the student.

Model system.

268


OPTION



Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)


General Objective 4.0: Know refrigeration flow controls


4.1 List flow controls used in R/A

system

4.2 State the needs for flow control in

R/A systems

4.3 State the functions of the flow

controls listed in 4.1

4.4 Explain the operation of the flow

controls in 4.1.

4.5 State the application of the flow

controls listed above.

4.6 List the factors, which guide the

selection of the flow controls in 4.1.

4.7 Carry out maintenance on flow

controls

• Ask the students to explain why

controls of R/A systems are necessary.

• Ask the students to state what each

control does in R/A system.

• Ask the students to conduct an

experiment to demonstrate practically.

• Ask students to state applications.

• Ask the students to state the factors.

• Ask the students to demonstrate

practically.

• Built model R/A

plant/Room

269


OPTION



Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)


General Objective 5.0: Understand other electrical/Electronic controls.


5.1 List other electrical/electronic

controls used in R/A system

a. motor cycling control

b. electrical/electronic

relays to interlock fans,

pumps, etc.

(amperage, potential,

hot-wire types)

c. solenoid and timers

d. defrosting switch

safety overload; full

automatic and semi-

automatic defrosting

control

e. motor starters

f. damper motor

g. float switch

5.2 State the function of the controls

listed in 5.1.

5.3 Explain the operation of the controls

listed in 5.1.

5.4 State the application of the controls

in 5.1.

5.5 List the factors that guide the

selection of the controls.

• Ask the students.

a. to list

electrical/electronic

controls.


functions of each of the controls listed

in 5.1.


applications of the controls in 5.1

• Explain procedures for trouble

shooting and maintenance of these

controls

• Ask the student to state the basis for

selection of controls.

• Ask the students.

i. to Explain common

faults in control.

ii. State the possible

causes of faults

iii. State remedial

measures

Do practical

maintenance in

workshop.

270


OPTION



Contact Hours:

(1,1,0)


General Objective 6.0: Understand control circuits


6.1 Interpret standard drawing, symbols

of electro mechanical control, elements

selector, check valves, etc.

6.2 Read control circuits for Air

conditioning and Refrigerator system.

6.3 Carry out simple design of control

system for Air conditioning and

Refrigerator.

• Ask the students

i. to identify control

symbols on a standard

control system

drawing.

ii. State their function

• Ask the students to read and interpret

the function of control circuit.

a. to carry out a simple

design for a particular

situation e.g. a small

room)

b. make a model and

test.

• Design project.

271

LIST OF WORKSHOP/LABORATORIES AND EQUIPMENT

LIST OF MINIMUM RESOURCES

MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST FOR ND

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY

PROGRAMME FOR 30 STUDENTS

WORKSHOPS

Machine shop

1. Tool room lathe with the swing of 483 and length of bed 200mm with complete accessories 2

2. Centre lathe with the swing of 330 and length of bed 1500mm with complete accessories 8

3 Universal milling machine complete with accessories 2

4. Radial drilling machine complete with accessories (optional) 1

5. Universal engraving machine complete with accessories 1

6. Surface grinding machine complete with accessories 1

7. Sensitive drilling machine. 2

8. Power hacksaw 2

9. Universal cylindrical grinding machine with accessories 1

10. Column/pillar drilling machine 2

11. Arbor press 1

12. Shaping maching with accessories

13. Pedestal grinding machine 2

14. Universal too, and cutter grinder 2

15. Box spanners 10

16. Allen Keys (set) 5 sets

17. Flat screw driver (set) 3 sets

18. Philips screw driver (set) 3 sets

19. Drift punches (various sizes) 4 each

20. Pin punches (set) 3 sets

21. Knurling tools (set) 2 sets

22. Vernier protractor 5

23. Parallel strips (assorted) 10

24. Micrometers outside 0.25mm 25-50mm 50-75mm and sets of Inside micrometers 5

272

25. Depth gauge 10

26. Steel rule 300mm 15

27. Calipers (inside and outside) 15 each

28. Vee block with clamps 4

29. Scribing block 4

30. Surface plate 3

31. Wheel dresser 2

32. Oil can 4

33. Hand reamers (se) 4

34. Machine reamers (set) 4 sets

35. Centre drills (set) 4 sets

36. Twist drills (set) 4 sets

37. Thread chaser (Assorted) 3 each

38. Marking out table 2

39. Combination set 4

40. Screw gauges (assorted) 4

41 Plug gauges (assorted) 4

42 Radius gauges (assorted) 4

43 Dial indicator and stand 4

44 Slip gauges (set) 2

45 Grease gun 4

46 Angle plates 2

47 Engineer’s square 10

48 Measuring balls/rollers (sets) 2

49 Limit gauges (various types) 5

50 Vernier calipers (various sizes) 5

51 Magnetic base 3

52 Fire extinguisher, water and sand buckets 4 each

FITTING SHOP

1 Work benches for 30 students

2 Bench vices 30

3 Pillar drilling machine 1

4 Marking out table 1

5 Sensitive bench drilling machine 2

273

6 Surface plate 2

7 Radial drilling machine 1

8 Pedestal grinder with drill grinding attachment 1

9 Power hacksaw 1

10 Multi purpose furnace 1

11 Arbor press 1

12 Flat rough file (300mm) 30

13 Round rough file (300mm) 30

14 Round smooth file (300mm) 30

15 Source rough file (300mm) 30

16 Flat smooth file 250mm) 30

17 Half round rough file (150mm) 30

18 Triangular rough file (150mm) 30

19 Half round smooth file (250mm) 30

20 Triangular smooth file (150mm) 30

21 Try-square 30

22 Dividers 30

23 Steel rule 30

24 Wallets of warding file 10 sets

25 Scribers 16

26 Vee block and clamp 2

27 Scribing block 2

28 Centre punches 30

29 Cold chisels (set) 10 sets

30 Scrapers (set) 5

31 Guilotine 2

32 Vernier Caliper 10

33 Hacksaw frame 30

34 Stock and dies (set) metric 3 sets

35 Taps and wrenches (set) metric 3 set

36 Hand drill 2

37 Centre drills Lot

38 Tap extractor (set) 2 sets

39 Screw extractor (set) 4

40 Screw gauges (assorted) 2 sets

274

41 Screw driver (set) 4 sets

42 Hammers (assorted weight) 30

43 Wire brush 5

44 Micrometer (assorted) 5

45 Oil can 5

46 Fire extinguisher, water and sand buckets 4 each

47 Measuring tapes 10

48 Feeler gauges 10

49 Rivet gun 6 pairs

50 Goggles 30 pairs

51 Drill set 4 sets

52 Electric Hand drill 2

53 Electric hand grinder/sander 5

54 Vernier height gauge 2

55 Dial indicators and stand 5

56 Mallets (rubber, wood and rawhide) 5 each

57 Number stamps 2 sets

58 Letter stamps 2

59 Hydraulic press 1

60 Punches (cold) 4 sets

61 Plier (assorted) 10

62 Hand shear 5

63 Welding chipping hammer 8

64 Wire brush (bench type) 8

65 Welding shield 8

66 Gloves 15

67 Gas bottle keys 4

68 Welding and cutting burner set 2

69 Gas cylinder truck 2

70 Brazing rods 6 tins

71 Flash gas lighter 4

72 Soldering flux 6 tins

73 Goggle 10

74 Blow lamps 10

75 Steel rule 10

275

76 Stools 6

77 Try-square 6

78 Leg vice 2 (opt)

79 Electrode drying oven 1

80 Swing beam folder 1

81 Bending roller 1

82 Double ended buffer and polisher 1

83 Profile cutting machine 1

84 Foot operated guillotine machine 1

85 Assorted cutting snips 10

86 Twist drill sets 4 sets

87 Electric hand drills 2

88 Aprons 10

WELDING AND FABRICATION SHOP

1 Welding transformer 8

2 MIG and MAG welding set 1

3 TIG Welding set 1

4 Acetylene gas cylinder 4

5 Oxygen gas cylinder 4

6 Welding table (gas) 4

7 Welding table (arc) 4

8 Protection screen for five booths for both arc and gas 10

9 Grinding machine (pedestal type) 2

10 Bench drilling machine 2

11 Bench polishing machine 1 (opt)

12 Bench shearing machine 1

13 Power hacksaw 1

14 Bench grinding machine 2

15 Bench vice 6

16 Anvil and stand 2

17 Electrode holder 8

18 Clamp 8

276

AUTOMATIVE SHOP

1 Engine diagnostic equipment 1

2 Hydraulic jack 5

3 Hydraulic press (100 tonne) 1

4 Manual table press 2

5 Standard service pit 2

6 Brake testing equipment with control panel 1

7. Sensitive drilling machine 2

8. Pedestal grinding machine 1

9. Pillar drilling machine 1 (opt)

10 Electric vulcaniser 1

11 Valve grinder 1

12 Workshop service compresser 1

13 Wheel balancing equipment (dynamic type) 1

14 Wheel alignment equipment 2

15 Work benches 4

16 Bench vices 6

17 Pneumatic tyre removal equipment 1

18 Injector pump test bench 1

19 Master Clinder test equipment 1

20 Universal battery charger 1

21 Engine mounting stand 3

22 Hydro-meters 5

23 Trolley Jacks 2

24 Foot operated grease dispenser 2

25 Complete mechanics tool kit 15

26 Electric hand drill 2

27 Breast drill (manual 2

28 Airline pressure gauge 4

29 Portable tyre inflator (manual) 2

30 Tyre repair kit 3

31 Heavy duty tyre changer 1

32 Ram - up to 6 tons capacity 1

33 Tachometer 2

277

34 Exhaust gas analyzer 1

35 Lubrication equipment 1

36 Portable crane 1

37 Valve refacer 2

38 Dynamometer 2

39 Cylinder boring machine 2

40 Steam cleaner 1

41 Diesel fuel pump test stand 1

42 Carburetor service kit 1

43 Chain wrench (for removing oil filter) 2

44 Portable vehicle hoist 1

45 Battery coil tester 2

46 Piston ring removal 2

47 Ignition coil tester 2

48 Snychroscope (distributor tester) 2

49 Spark plug tester 2

50 Pullers (various sizes) 6

51 Grease gun 6

52 Cylinder ridge remover 6

53 Engine sump drainer 6

54 Honing machine 1

55 Crankshaft grinder 1

56 Armature lathe 1

57 Head light tester 2

58 Oil can 6

59 2 stroke diesel engine 3

61 4 Cylinder diesel engine 2

62 6 Cylinder petrol engine 2

63 Clutch testing machine 1

64 Fire extinguishers, water, foam, dry powder, and sand buckets 1

65 Life and dead vehicles 6 each

66 Spanners of assorted types and sizes

67 Transparent engine, gear boxes (for demonstration) 1

68 Automotive engine test bed 1

69 Steering geometry measuring device 1

278

70 Vibration meter 1

71 Electrolytic tester 1

72 Fuel consumption measuring system 1

73 Flash point apparatus 1

74 Test rig for electric fuel injector (Petrol) 1

BUILDING SERVICE, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

1 Vacuum pump 1

2 Charging unit 1

3 Internal cleaning apparatus 1

4 Mechanical pressure gauge 4

5 Electronic pressure gauge 4

6 Recording pressure motor 4

7 Differential pressure gauge 4

8 Service man’s thermometer 4

9 Sensor dial thermometer (various degrees) 4 each

10 Electronic thermometer 4

11 Sling Hygrometer O to 35oC 4

12 Temperature probe 4

13 Capacity analyzer 4

14 Test cord 6

15 Electronic air velocity meter 4

16 Revolution counter 4


18 Heavy duty machine vice 1

19 Portable electric drill 2

20 Angle grinder 1

21 Pedestal grinder 1

22 Air compressor 1

23 Recording hygrometer 1

24 Electronic volt-watt meter 1

25 Clip-on-volt-amp-ohm meter 1

26 Ohm-meter 1

27 Gas flame leak detector 1

28 Pipe vice 4

279

29 Bench vice 4

30 Work bench 3

31 Anvil 1

32 Pilers (various sizes) 4 each

33 Hoisting pulley block 4

34 Wheel dresser (for grinding wheels) 4

35 Emergency lamp 1

36 Respirator 10

37 Safety face screen (face shield) 10

38 Ear protector 10

39 Working gloves 10 pairs

40 Spanners (various sizes and shapes) 4 each

41 Wrenches (various sizes) 2 each

42 Hammers (various types and sizes) 2

43 Screw drivers (various sizes) 8

44 Files (assorted) 3 each

45 Brushes 6

46 Constant pressure valve 2

47 Pilot pressure valve 2

48 Suction valve 2

49 Thermostatic water valve 2

50 Thermostatic liquid valve 2

51 Molecular sieve driver 2

52 Rechargeable drier 2

53 Shut - diff valve 10

54 liquid level control 1

55 Vibration absorber 2

56 Process tube adaptor 2

57 Gauge adaptor 2

58 Tab ‘A’ - can valve 8

59 Fire extinguisher and sand buckets 6 each

60 Surge in pipe apparatus 1

61 Hydrostatic Bench 1

62 Air flow demonstration apparatus 1

63 Laminar/turbulent pipe flow 1

280

64 Boiler and steam piping instrument (lab. type) 1

65 Smoke tunnel 1

66 Centrifugal and axial fan test rings 1

67 Heat exchanger

68 Refrigeration and Air conditioning control test ring 1

69 Remaerant cylinders 2

FOUNDRY/HEAT TREATMENT/FORGE WORKSHOP

1 Black smith forge 1

2 Anvil and stand 8

3 Tongs (assorted 5 each

4 Swage block 2

5 Leg vice 2

6 Black smith hand hammer (various sizes) 6 each

7 Sledge hammer 4

8 Flatters 6

9 Hardles 6

10 Hot chisels 6

11 Cold chisels 6

12 Fuller 6

13 Top and bottom swage (various sizes) 6 each

14 Heading tool 6 each

15 Heat treatment furnace 1

16 Salt bath furnace 1

17 Electric furnace with control

18 Queching bath 2

19 Thermocouples 5

20 Optical pyrometer 2

21 Induction hardening equipment 1

22 Flame hardening equipment 2

23 Carburising equipment 2

24 Crucible furnace 1

25 Crucible 4

26 Crucible rest or stool 2

27 Crucible lifting tongs 2

281

28 Combined slag lifter and skimming ladle 1

29 Combined portable thermocouple pyrometer 1

30 Degreasing plunger 2

31 Hammers (assorted 6 each

32 Wire brush 2



35 Hacksaw frame and blades 10

36 Tapered shank drill bits 2 sets

37 Straight shank drill bits 2 sets

38 Drill drift 2 sets

39 Eye Goggles 10

40 Face shield 10

41 Heat resistant gloves 10 pairs

42 Knee leggings (foundry) 10 pairs

43 Leather apron 10 pairs

44 Safety boots (fire resistant) 10

45 Moulding bench 10

46 Bottom flask 20

47 Moulding flask 20

48 Moulding gand shovel 20

49 Watering can 5

50 Wheel-barrow 4

51 Rammers (various types) 20

52 Moulding trowels (various sizes) 10

53 Strike-off-bars 10

54 Gate cutter or spoon 10

55 Sprue pins 20

56 Vent rods 20

57 Bellows 5

58 Lifters 10

59 Bubb sponges 5

60 Draw pins 50

61 Wet brush 30

62 Bench vice 4

282

63 Hand vice 2

64 Cutting pliers

65 Combination pliers 10

66 Half round bastard file 10

67 Flat file second cut 10

68 Triangular file 10

69 Round file 10

70 Sand mixing machine 1

71 Moulding machine 1

72 Continuous mixer machine dispenser 1

73 Core boxes 10

74 G. Clamps 10

75 Core driver 1

76 Woodworking lathe 1

77 Circular saw 2

78 Band saw 2

79 Jig saw 2

80 Wood plan-machine

81 Jointer 1

82 Scraper 1

83 Pattern milling M/C

84 Disc and bobbing sander

85 Measuring and Marking out tools 10

86 Sawing, planning, boring, turning etc tools 10 each

87 Charge make - up Scale (100 kg scale)

DRAWING STUDIO

1 Drawing table complete with drafting machine/stood 30

2 Drawing set complete with pens for ink work 2

3 45o set squares 2

4 60o set squares 2

5 Blue printing machine 1

6 Adjustable set squares 5

7 Desk sharpener 5

8 Triangular scale rule (30mm) 5

283

9 Flat scale rule (300mm) 5

10 Blackboard ruler (1m) 4-1

11 Blackboard Tee squares 4-1

12 Blackboard set square (45o 60o) 4 each-2

13 Blackboard compasses 4-1

14 Blackboard protractor 4-1

15 French curve set 5

16 Letter stencils (3mm, 6mm, 7mm and 10mm) 5 each

17 Rubber stencils (3mm, 6mm, 7mm, 6mm and 10mm) 5 each

18 Erasing stencils 5 each

19 Drawing rack/shelves for 30 students

20 Personal computers 2

21 Plotter 1

22 Printer to handle A3 size 1

MECHANICAL MACHINES

1 Screw Jack 1

2 Oldham coupling 1

3 Four bar chain mechanism 1

4 Whitworth quick return mechanism 1

5 Slider crank mechanism 1

6 Hooks joint 1

7 Geneva stop 1

8 Conservation of angular momentum 1

9 Forces on beam apparatus 1

10 Simple moment beam 1

11 Comprehensive fly wheel apparatus 1

12 Bourdon tube pressure gauge 1

13 Torsion of bar apparatus 1

14 Spring balance 1

15 Gearing system apparatus 1

16 Compression apparatus 1

17 Wheel and axle set 1

18 Centrifugal/centripetal apparatus 1

19 Polygon of force apparatus 1

284

20 Extension and compression of springs apparatus 1

21 Crank and connecting rod apparatus 1

22 Rope, belt and coil friction apparatus 1

23 Cam and cam follower mechanism 1

24 Fire extinguishers 4-2

25 Sand and water buckets 4

STRENGTH OF MATERIALS

1 Shearing force apparatus 1

2 Bending moment apparatus 1

3 Tensometer 1

4 Fire extinguishers 4



7 Hydrostatic Bench 1

8 Air flow demonstration apparatus 1

9 Laminar/turbulent pipe flow 1

10 Centrifugal and axial fan test rings 1

FLUID MECHANICS/HYDRAULICS

1 Turbine set (pelfon, francis pump, or Kaplan) 1

2 Hydraulics Bench with accessories for various experiments in fluid flow measurements 3

3 Weir tank (impact on jet, orificer 2

4 Floating body apparatus 1

5 Manometer 1

6 Rotameter 1

7 Laminar flow apparatus 1

8 Pilot static tube 1

9 Water meter 2

10 Boiler and steam piping instrument (lab. type) 1

11 Smoke tunnel 1

12 Heat exchanger 1

285

THERMODYNAMIC/HEAT ENGINES

1 Water heater/stirrer unit with bath 1

2 Uncalibrated mercury in glass thermometer 10o to 110oc 25

3 Resistance thermometer 1

4 Bench mounted aircooled 2 stroke diesel engine rig including dynamometer 1

5 Bench mounted aircooled 2 stroke petrol engine rig including dynamometer 1

6 Auto bomb calorimeter 1

7 Boyle gas calorimeter 1

8 Grant gas analyzer 1

9 Tachometer 1

10 Stroboscope 1

11 Air compressor test set 1

12 Thermal conductivity apparatus 1

13 Marcet boiler 1

14 Steam boiler plant (laboratory type) 1

15 Mechanical equivalent of heat apparatus 1

16 High pressure vapour unit 1

17 Vapour density apparatus 1

18 Pressure cooker 1

19 Falling ball viscometer 1

20 Rotary viscometer 1

21 Gas laws apparatus 1

22 Speedomax recorder 1

23 Thermal anemometer 1

24 Electric anemometer 1

25 Pyrometer, infrared, non-contact digital infratrace 1

26 Combined separating and throttling calorimeter 1



29 Air thermometer constant volume 4

30 Boiler and steam piping instrument 1

31 Smoke tunnel 1

32 Heat exchanger 1

286

AUTOMOTIVE

1 Automotive engine test bed 1

2 Automotive instructional system 1

3 Electronic engine indicating equipment 1

4 Engine cooling water system 1

5 Fuel consumption measurement system 1

6 Gravimetric fuel system 1

7 Lubricating oil test rig 1

8 Wear and friction bearing test apparatus 1

9 Injector type HC 50 1

10 Hydraulic dynamometer 1

11 Vibration meter 1

12 Steering geometry measuring device 1

13 Compression meter 1

14 Electrolytic tester 1

15 PH meter 1

16 Battery tester 4

17 Automatic fuel flow meter 1

18 Orifice inlet air meter 1

19 Balancing machine 1

20 Exhaust emission unit 1

21 Flash point apparatus 1

22 Automobile final drive 1

23 PV diagram function generator 1

24 Digital Tachometer 1

25 Coolant flow meter 1

26 Exhaust gas calorimeter 1

27 Lean/rich mixture device 1


29 Sand buckets 4

287

MATERIALS SCIENCE

1 Floor mounted tensile/compression testing machine with accessories 1

2 X-Y recorder for tensile tester 1

3 Table top tensometer with accessories 1

4 Macroharcness testing machine (Grinell,, Vickers, Rocawich) 1 each

5 Impact testers (fzod, chafpy) 2

6 Micro hardness testing machine 1

7 Strain gauge 2

8 Creep testing machine 1

9 Torsion tester 1

10 Fatigue tester 1

11 Steel rule 300mm 5

12 Outside caliper 2

13 Inside caliper 5

14 Set of open ended spanners 2

15 Micrometer screw gauge (metric) 2 sets

16 Allen keys 2 sets

17 Screw drivers 2

18 Abbrastive cutters 1

19 Dial gauge 1


21 Fire extinguisher 1


23 Grinding machine 2

24 Polishing machine 2

25 Metallurgical microscopes 5

26 Parting machine 1

27 Etching machine 1

28 Microscope 1

29 Specimen mounting screen 2

30 Decicators 2

288

METROLOGY LABORATORY

1 Comparator (Mechanical) 1

2 Universal measuring microscope 1

3 Bench testing centers 1

4 Angle gauge 1

5 Set of slip gauge 1

6 Sine bars with centers 1

7 Engineers level 1

8 Micrometers (assorted denomination) 2 each

9 Vee blocks (assorted sizes) 2 each

10 Magnetic vee block 1

11 Vernier calipers 3

12 Vernier height gauge 2

13 Angle plate 1

14 Limit gauges for holes, shafts, and threads 3 each

15 Surface plate 1

16 Marking out table 1

17 Parallel strips 4 pairs

18 Bevel protractor 2

19 Dial gauges and magnetic stand 2

20 Engineers’ square 2

21 Thread gauge 2

22 Radius gauge 2

23 Feeler gauge 2

24 Steer rule 4

25 Combination set 2

LABORATORIES FOR HND PROGRAMME IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY

The laboratories and workshops listed for the National Diploma Programme are also needed for the Higher

National Diploma Programme. In addition, the following laboratories are also required:

289

1 Metrology - for Machine Building and Production options

2 Automotive - for Automotive option

3 Building Services and refrigeration

4 Power/Plant

The equipment and tools for laboratories and workshops for the national diploma programmes are needed

for the Higher National Diploma Programmes. In addition the following equipment and tools are also

necessary for the programme.

MACHINE BUILDING AND PRODUCTION (ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT LIST)

1 Copy lathe (with the following attachments:

- taper turning attachment 1

- hydraulic profiling (copying) attachment 1

- relieving equipment 1

- spherical turning slide 1

2 Turret or Capstan lathe complete with accessories 1

3 Universal engraving and copy milling machine 1

5 Jig boring machine or vertical milling machine complete with accessories, including: 1

- boring heads

- circular table

- honing head

5 Slotting machine or vertical milling machine with slotting attachment 1

6 Spark erosion machine or ultrasonic machine 1

7 Broaching machine (orzonal) 1

8 Complete numerical control lathe or numerical control vertical milling/drilling machine (CNC) 1

9 Universal cylindrical grinding machine (optimal) with the following; 1

- form dressing attachment

- in process gauging unit or device

10 Hydraulic press 1

11 Gear hobbing machine or gear shaping machine complete with accessories

12 And various module cutters 1

13 Single spindle automatic lathe or sliding head automatic lathe 1

14 Lathe dynamometer 1

15 Drill dynamometer 1

290

16 Pneumatic circuit bench for automatic and semi-automatic control 2

17 Swiveling vice 2


19 Water and sand buckets 4

HND MECHANICAL (AUTO LAB) (ADDITIONAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT LIST)

Automotive Laboratory

1 AC charging kit 1

2 Radiator pressure tester 1

3 Universal rear axle preload gauge 1

4 Dial indicator with stands 2

5 Spring balance 2

6 Ignition timing light 1

7 Voltmeter 2

8 Ammeter 2

9 Ohmmeter 2

10 Digital Vernier caliper 2

11 Vee blocks 4

12 External micrometer: 25mm-50mm 2

50mm-75mm 2

75mm-100mm 2

13 Internal micrometer 2

14 Comparator 1

15 Engine cylinder pressure tester 2

POWER/PLANT LABORATORY

1 Air Flow Measurement Demonstration Air Flow test rig 1

2 Smoke Tunnel 1

3 Heat Transfer Apparatus-Parallel Counter Flow 1

4 Double Pipe Heat Exchanger 1

6 Steam Power Plant Including Steam Boiler Condenser, Steam Turbine, Steam

7 Engine and Steam Fittings (Laboratory Type) 1 set

Engine Test Beds with: Petrol and Diesel Engine, CI and SI Two Stroke and Four stroke 1 set each

291

8 Tutor Gas Turbine 1

9 Two Stage Compressor Test set 1

10 Pump and Water Turbine Test Set 1

11 Air Heaters 1

12 Dust Extractors 1

13 Draught Equipment (Fans) 1

14 Fire Extinguishers 4

15 Sand Buckets 2

Building Services and Refrigeration Laboratory


2 Centrifugal pump test rig (series parallel) 1

3 Various sensor and incorporating actuators

4 Experimental heat pump and air cooler 1

5 Refrigeration cycle apparatus 1

6 Barometer aneroid 1

7 Thermo-hydrograph 1

8 Solarimeter 1

9 Windspeed meter 1

10 Vapour compression refrigerator & heat pump apparatus 1

11 Air-conditioning unit 1

12 Refrigeration bench 1

13 Refrigeration expansion devices 1

14 Multipurpose air duct 1

15 Sound level indicator 1

16 Environmental light comparator 1


18 Sand buckets 2

19 Pressure-hydraulic and manual 2

20 Pychrometer 1

292

Mechanics of Machine Laboratory

1 Static and dynamic balance apparatus 1

2 Governor apparatus 1

3 Efficiency of screw threads apparatus 1

4 Clutch friction apparatus 1

5 Gyroscope apparatus 1

6 Angular acceleration apparatus 1

7 /whirling dust apparatus 1

8 Universal vibration apparatus 1

9 Differentiate gear assembly 1

Strength of Materials Laboratory

1 Compression and tensile testing machine (100KN) 1

2 Universal hardness testing machine 1

(Brinell, Vickers, Rockwell) 1

3 Fatique testing machine 1

4 Thick cylinder apparatus 1

5 Thin cylinder apparatus 1

6 Strut rig apparatus 1

7 Creep measuring apparatus 1

8 Universal cantilever apparatus 1

9 Portable strain meter 1

10 Beam apparatus 1

11 Close coiled spring apparatus 1

12 Leaf spring testing machine 1

Fluid Mechanic/Hydraulics Laboratory

1 Bermnoullin apparatus 1

2 Losses in fitting and pipe bending apparatus 1

3 Universal pump testing unit 1

4 Centrifugal pump set 1

5 Reciprocating pump set 1

6 Free and force vortices apparatus 1

293

7 Parallel-series centrifugal pump set 1

8 Universal radial flow apparatus 1

9 Hot wire anemometer 2

10 Pelton wheel apparatus 1

11 Wind tunnel 1

294

GUIDELINES FOR TEXTBOOK WRITERS

NATIONAL DIPLOMA AND HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA

The following guidelines are suggestions from the Engineering Committees to the writers of the textbooks for

the new curricula. They are intended to supplement the detailed syllabuses which have been produced, and

which define the content and level of the courses.

Authors should bear in mind that the curriculum has been designed to give the students a broad

understanding of applications in industry and commerce, and this is reflected in the curriculum objectives.

• One book should be produced for each syllabus

• Page size should be A4

• The front size should be 12 point for normal text and 14 point where emphasis is needed

• Line spacing should be set to 1.5 lines

• Headings and subheadings should be emboldened

• Photographs, diagrams and charts should be used extensively throughout the book, and

these items must be up-to-date

• In all cases, the material must be related to industry and commerce, using real life

examples wherever possible so that the book is not just a theory book. It must help the

students to see the subject in the context of the ‘real word’

• The philosophy of the courses is one of an integrated approach to theory and practice, and

as such, the books should reflect this by not making an artificial divide between theory and

practice.

• Illustrations should be labeled and numbered.

• Examples should be drawn from Nigeria wherever possible, so that the information is set in

a country context.

• Each chapter should end with student self-assessment questions (SAG) so that students

can check their own master of the subject

• Accurate instructions should be given for any practical work having first conducted the

practical to check that the instructions do indeed work

• The books must have a proper index or table of contents, a list of references and an

introduction based on the overall course philosophy and aims of the syllabus.

• Symbols and units must be listed and a unified approach used throughout the book

• In case of queries regarding the contents of the books and the depth of information, the

author must contact the relevant curriculum committee via the National Board for Technical

Education

• The final draft version of the books should be submitted to Nigerian members of the

curriculum working groups for their comments regarding the content in relation to the desired

syllabus.

295

LIST OF PARTICIPANTS

UNESCO-NIGERIA PROJECT IN SUPPORT OF REVITILISATION OF

TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION IN NIGERIA

PROJECT TEAM MEMBERS

S/No. NAME DESIGNATION

1 Engr. Dr. Nuru A. Yakubu National Project Coordinator & Executive Secretary, NBTE

2 Dr. M.S. Abubakar Technical Coordinator

3 Engr. S.C. Odumah Curriculum Development Coordinator

4 Mr. B.N. Niriyus Staff Development Coordinator

5 Engr. Dr. S.N. Mumah Information & Communication Technology Coordinator

6 Isa Alhaji Sulaimanu Project Accountant

7 Mal. A.D.K. Muhammad Project Officer

Curriculum Review Team Members for Information and Communication Technology

(ND/HND Programmes)

S/No. NAME ADDRESS

1 Engr. Dr. S.N. Mumah Kaduna Polytechnic (ICT Coordinator)

1 Dr. (Mrs) A.O. Osofisan University of Ibadan(Team Leader)

2 Dr. (Mrs) Iyabo Fagbulu UNESCO, Abuja

3 Mrs A. Olarewaju HTCC, Kaduna Polytechnic

4 Mr. A. Adekigbe Federal Polytechnic, Ede

5 Dr. O.E. Osuagwa Federal University of Technology, Owerri

6 Dr. E.R. Adagunodo O.A.U. Ile-Ife

2nd PHASE REVIEW

1 Mrs A. Olarewaju HTCC, Kaduna Polytechnic

2 Engr. E.C. Onyeiwu ECO Project Services, Kaduna

296

Review Committee

1. Engr. J. O. Akindapo NDA Kaduna

2. Engr. I. A. Adeleke Fed. Poly. Ilaro

3. D.S. Yawas A.B.U Zaria

4. Engr. B. A Olunlade E.M.D.I P.M.B 611 Akure

5. Engr. Dr. S.E. Chukwujekwu Ebunso Nig. Ltd. Nnewi

6. Engr. M. B. Ibotolu Nig, Mach, Tools ltd Oshogbo

7. Engr. M. D. Ukegbu Fed. Poly. Ado-Ekiti

8. Prof. S. A Balogun UNILAG

9. Engr. D. O. Ariyo Kwara State Polytechnic

10. Engr. O. L Solarin Ikeja L.G.A

11. Engr. D. M Princewill River State Poly. Bori

12. Engr. V.U.U Akpan P.O.Box 6462 Ikeja-Lagos

13. Engr. A. Sule Federal Polytechnic Bida

14. Engr. Kgt T.J. Dareta National Oil Plc Marina Lagos

15. Engr. M. I Oti Kaduna Polytechnic

16. Dr. J.S Diso B.U.K

17. Engr. Prof. E.I Ofodile COREN, WUSE II Abuja

18. Engr. S. K. Loko Yaba College of Technology Lagos

19. Engr. E. a Babaniji NACCIMA/ACEH

20. Y.K. Ogunjimi ITF-Lagos

21. Engr. Samuel John A.B.U Zaria

22. Engr. C. E. Eteng Federal Polytechnic Bauchi

297

Final Review Committee

1. Garry I. Cather Brighton university 3 Mill Walk Woola

Vington. Nr. Briedgewater Somerset

TA78 HW, UK

2. Engr. Dr. Sam Chukwujekwu Ebunso Nig. Ltd

25 Amiliba Road Otolo, Nnewi

3. Engr. M. D. Ukegbu Federal Polytechnic

Ado-Ekiti

4. Prof. E.I. E. Ofo Dile Registrar COREN 466 Lobito Crescent,

Wuse 2, Abuja

5. Engr. Aderemi Oke Polytechnic Division NBTE, Kaduna

6. Engr. M.I, Oti Mech. Eng. Dept Kaduna Poly. Kaduna

7. Engr. O. Odekunle Peugeot Automobile Nig. Ltd. Kaduna

Documents

Mechanical engineering: Higher National Diploma (HND